From 6bb047690e22a0d1027305c8be257c51036286be Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: John MacFarlane <jgm@berkeley.edu>
Date: Sat, 29 Jan 2022 15:35:57 -0800
Subject: [PATCH] Regenerate man page.
---
man/pandoc.1 | 3641 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++----------------------
1 file changed, 2034 insertions(+), 1607 deletions(-)
diff --git a/man/pandoc.1 b/man/pandoc.1
index 97133a9ab..092ebb2ad 100644
--- a/man/pandoc.1
+++ b/man/pandoc.1
@@ -1,13 +1,27 @@
'\" t
-.\" Automatically generated by Pandoc 2.16.2
+.\" Automatically generated by Pandoc 2.17.0.1
.\"
+.\" Define V font for inline verbatim, using C font in formats
+.\" that render this, and otherwise B font.
+.ie "\f[CB]x\f[]"x" \{\
+. ftr V B
+. ftr VI BI
+. ftr VB B
+. ftr VBI BI
+.\}
+.el \{\
+. ftr V CR
+. ftr VI CI
+. ftr VB CB
+. ftr VBI CBI
+.\}
.TH "Pandoc User\[cq]s Guide" "" "January 14, 2022" "pandoc 2.17.0.1" ""
.hy
.SH NAME
pandoc - general markup converter
.SH SYNOPSIS
.PP
-\f[C]pandoc\f[R] [\f[I]options\f[R]] [\f[I]input-file\f[R]]\&...
+\f[V]pandoc\f[R] [\f[I]options\f[R]] [\f[I]input-file\f[R]]\&...
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Pandoc is a Haskell library for converting from one markup format to
@@ -16,8 +30,8 @@ another, and a command-line tool that uses this library.
Pandoc can convert between numerous markup and word processing formats,
including, but not limited to, various flavors of Markdown, HTML, LaTeX
and Word docx.
-For the full lists of input and output formats, see the \f[C]--from\f[R]
-and \f[C]--to\f[R] options below.
+For the full lists of input and output formats, see the \f[V]--from\f[R]
+and \f[V]--to\f[R] options below.
Pandoc can also produce PDF output: see creating a PDF, below.
.PP
Pandoc\[cq]s enhanced version of Markdown includes syntax for tables,
@@ -48,7 +62,7 @@ Markdown can be expected to be lossy.
If no \f[I]input-files\f[R] are specified, input is read from
\f[I]stdin\f[R].
Output goes to \f[I]stdout\f[R] by default.
-For output to a file, use the \f[C]-o\f[R] option:
+For output to a file, use the \f[V]-o\f[R] option:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -58,8 +72,8 @@ pandoc -o output.html input.txt
.PP
By default, pandoc produces a document fragment.
To produce a standalone document (e.g.\ a valid HTML file including
-\f[C]<head>\f[R] and \f[C]<body>\f[R]), use the \f[C]-s\f[R] or
-\f[C]--standalone\f[R] flag:
+\f[V]<head>\f[R] and \f[V]<body>\f[R]), use the \f[V]-s\f[R] or
+\f[V]--standalone\f[R] flag:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -72,14 +86,14 @@ Templates below.
.PP
If multiple input files are given, pandoc will concatenate them all
(with blank lines between them) before parsing.
-(Use \f[C]--file-scope\f[R] to parse files individually.)
+(Use \f[V]--file-scope\f[R] to parse files individually.)
.SS Specifying formats
.PP
The format of the input and output can be specified explicitly using
command-line options.
-The input format can be specified using the \f[C]-f/--from\f[R] option,
-the output format using the \f[C]-t/--to\f[R] option.
-Thus, to convert \f[C]hello.txt\f[R] from Markdown to LaTeX, you could
+The input format can be specified using the \f[V]-f/--from\f[R] option,
+the output format using the \f[V]-t/--to\f[R] option.
+Thus, to convert \f[V]hello.txt\f[R] from Markdown to LaTeX, you could
type:
.IP
.nf
@@ -88,7 +102,7 @@ pandoc -f markdown -t latex hello.txt
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-To convert \f[C]hello.html\f[R] from HTML to Markdown:
+To convert \f[V]hello.html\f[R] from HTML to Markdown:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -97,9 +111,9 @@ pandoc -f html -t markdown hello.html
.fi
.PP
Supported input and output formats are listed below under Options (see
-\f[C]-f\f[R] for input formats and \f[C]-t\f[R] for output formats).
-You can also use \f[C]pandoc --list-input-formats\f[R] and
-\f[C]pandoc --list-output-formats\f[R] to print lists of supported
+\f[V]-f\f[R] for input formats and \f[V]-t\f[R] for output formats).
+You can also use \f[V]pandoc --list-input-formats\f[R] and
+\f[V]pandoc --list-output-formats\f[R] to print lists of supported
formats.
.PP
If the input or output format is not specified explicitly, pandoc will
@@ -112,7 +126,7 @@ pandoc -o hello.tex hello.txt
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-will convert \f[C]hello.txt\f[R] from Markdown to LaTeX.
+will convert \f[V]hello.txt\f[R] from Markdown to LaTeX.
If no output file is specified (so that output goes to
\f[I]stdout\f[R]), or if the output file\[cq]s extension is unknown, the
output format will default to HTML.
@@ -123,7 +137,7 @@ input format will be assumed to be Markdown.
.PP
Pandoc uses the UTF-8 character encoding for both input and output.
If your local character encoding is not UTF-8, you should pipe input and
-output through \f[C]iconv\f[R]:
+output through \f[V]iconv\f[R]:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -134,10 +148,10 @@ iconv -t utf-8 input.txt | pandoc | iconv -f utf-8
Note that in some output formats (such as HTML, LaTeX, ConTeXt, RTF,
OPML, DocBook, and Texinfo), information about the character encoding is
included in the document header, which will only be included if you use
-the \f[C]-s/--standalone\f[R] option.
+the \f[V]-s/--standalone\f[R] option.
.SS Creating a PDF
.PP
-To produce a PDF, specify an output file with a \f[C].pdf\f[R]
+To produce a PDF, specify an output file with a \f[V].pdf\f[R]
extension:
.IP
.nf
@@ -147,56 +161,56 @@ pandoc test.txt -o test.pdf
.fi
.PP
By default, pandoc will use LaTeX to create the PDF, which requires that
-a LaTeX engine be installed (see \f[C]--pdf-engine\f[R] below).
+a LaTeX engine be installed (see \f[V]--pdf-engine\f[R] below).
Alternatively, pandoc can use ConTeXt, roff ms, or HTML as an
intermediate format.
-To do this, specify an output file with a \f[C].pdf\f[R] extension, as
-before, but add the \f[C]--pdf-engine\f[R] option or
-\f[C]-t context\f[R], \f[C]-t html\f[R], or \f[C]-t ms\f[R] to the
+To do this, specify an output file with a \f[V].pdf\f[R] extension, as
+before, but add the \f[V]--pdf-engine\f[R] option or
+\f[V]-t context\f[R], \f[V]-t html\f[R], or \f[V]-t ms\f[R] to the
command line.
The tool used to generate the PDF from the intermediate format may be
-specified using \f[C]--pdf-engine\f[R].
+specified using \f[V]--pdf-engine\f[R].
.PP
You can control the PDF style using variables, depending on the
intermediate format used: see variables for LaTeX, variables for
-ConTeXt, variables for \f[C]wkhtmltopdf\f[R], variables for ms.
+ConTeXt, variables for \f[V]wkhtmltopdf\f[R], variables for ms.
When HTML is used as an intermediate format, the output can be styled
-using \f[C]--css\f[R].
+using \f[V]--css\f[R].
.PP
To debug the PDF creation, it can be useful to look at the intermediate
-representation: instead of \f[C]-o test.pdf\f[R], use for example
-\f[C]-s -o test.tex\f[R] to output the generated LaTeX.
-You can then test it with \f[C]pdflatex test.tex\f[R].
+representation: instead of \f[V]-o test.pdf\f[R], use for example
+\f[V]-s -o test.tex\f[R] to output the generated LaTeX.
+You can then test it with \f[V]pdflatex test.tex\f[R].
.PP
When using LaTeX, the following packages need to be available (they are
-included with all recent versions of TeX Live): \f[C]amsfonts\f[R],
-\f[C]amsmath\f[R], \f[C]lm\f[R], \f[C]unicode-math\f[R],
-\f[C]iftex\f[R], \f[C]listings\f[R] (if the \f[C]--listings\f[R] option
-is used), \f[C]fancyvrb\f[R], \f[C]longtable\f[R], \f[C]booktabs\f[R],
-\f[C]graphicx\f[R] (if the document contains images),
-\f[C]hyperref\f[R], \f[C]xcolor\f[R], \f[C]ulem\f[R], \f[C]geometry\f[R]
-(with the \f[C]geometry\f[R] variable set), \f[C]setspace\f[R] (with
-\f[C]linestretch\f[R]), and \f[C]babel\f[R] (with \f[C]lang\f[R]).
-If \f[C]CJKmainfont\f[R] is set, \f[C]xeCJK\f[R] is needed.
-The use of \f[C]xelatex\f[R] or \f[C]lualatex\f[R] as the PDF engine
-requires \f[C]fontspec\f[R].
-\f[C]lualatex\f[R] uses \f[C]selnolig\f[R].
-\f[C]xelatex\f[R] uses \f[C]bidi\f[R] (with the \f[C]dir\f[R] variable
+included with all recent versions of TeX Live): \f[V]amsfonts\f[R],
+\f[V]amsmath\f[R], \f[V]lm\f[R], \f[V]unicode-math\f[R],
+\f[V]iftex\f[R], \f[V]listings\f[R] (if the \f[V]--listings\f[R] option
+is used), \f[V]fancyvrb\f[R], \f[V]longtable\f[R], \f[V]booktabs\f[R],
+\f[V]graphicx\f[R] (if the document contains images),
+\f[V]hyperref\f[R], \f[V]xcolor\f[R], \f[V]ulem\f[R], \f[V]geometry\f[R]
+(with the \f[V]geometry\f[R] variable set), \f[V]setspace\f[R] (with
+\f[V]linestretch\f[R]), and \f[V]babel\f[R] (with \f[V]lang\f[R]).
+If \f[V]CJKmainfont\f[R] is set, \f[V]xeCJK\f[R] is needed.
+The use of \f[V]xelatex\f[R] or \f[V]lualatex\f[R] as the PDF engine
+requires \f[V]fontspec\f[R].
+\f[V]lualatex\f[R] uses \f[V]selnolig\f[R].
+\f[V]xelatex\f[R] uses \f[V]bidi\f[R] (with the \f[V]dir\f[R] variable
set).
-If the \f[C]mathspec\f[R] variable is set, \f[C]xelatex\f[R] will use
-\f[C]mathspec\f[R] instead of \f[C]unicode-math\f[R].
-The \f[C]upquote\f[R] and \f[C]microtype\f[R] packages are used if
-available, and \f[C]csquotes\f[R] will be used for typography if the
-\f[C]csquotes\f[R] variable or metadata field is set to a true value.
-The \f[C]natbib\f[R], \f[C]biblatex\f[R], \f[C]bibtex\f[R], and
-\f[C]biber\f[R] packages can optionally be used for citation rendering.
+If the \f[V]mathspec\f[R] variable is set, \f[V]xelatex\f[R] will use
+\f[V]mathspec\f[R] instead of \f[V]unicode-math\f[R].
+The \f[V]upquote\f[R] and \f[V]microtype\f[R] packages are used if
+available, and \f[V]csquotes\f[R] will be used for typography if the
+\f[V]csquotes\f[R] variable or metadata field is set to a true value.
+The \f[V]natbib\f[R], \f[V]biblatex\f[R], \f[V]bibtex\f[R], and
+\f[V]biber\f[R] packages can optionally be used for citation rendering.
The following packages will be used to improve output quality if
present, but pandoc does not require them to be present:
-\f[C]upquote\f[R] (for straight quotes in verbatim environments),
-\f[C]microtype\f[R] (for better spacing adjustments), \f[C]parskip\f[R]
-(for better inter-paragraph spaces), \f[C]xurl\f[R] (for better line
-breaks in URLs), \f[C]bookmark\f[R] (for better PDF bookmarks), and
-\f[C]footnotehyper\f[R] or \f[C]footnote\f[R] (to allow footnotes in
+\f[V]upquote\f[R] (for straight quotes in verbatim environments),
+\f[V]microtype\f[R] (for better spacing adjustments), \f[V]parskip\f[R]
+(for better inter-paragraph spaces), \f[V]xurl\f[R] (for better line
+breaks in URLs), \f[V]bookmark\f[R] (for better PDF bookmarks), and
+\f[V]footnotehyper\f[R] or \f[V]footnote\f[R] (to allow footnotes in
tables).
.SS Reading from the Web
.PP
@@ -221,275 +235,275 @@ pandoc -f html -t markdown --request-header User-Agent:\[dq]Mozilla/5.0\[dq] \[r
.SH OPTIONS
.SS General options
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-f\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]-r\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--from=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--read=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]
+\f[V]-f\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[V]-r\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[V]--from=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[V]--read=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]
Specify input format.
\f[I]FORMAT\f[R] can be:
.RS
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]bibtex\f[R] (BibTeX bibliography)
+\f[V]bibtex\f[R] (BibTeX bibliography)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]biblatex\f[R] (BibLaTeX bibliography)
+\f[V]biblatex\f[R] (BibLaTeX bibliography)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]commonmark\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown)
+\f[V]commonmark\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]commonmark_x\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown with extensions)
+\f[V]commonmark_x\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown with extensions)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]creole\f[R] (Creole 1.0)
+\f[V]creole\f[R] (Creole 1.0)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]csljson\f[R] (CSL JSON bibliography)
+\f[V]csljson\f[R] (CSL JSON bibliography)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]csv\f[R] (CSV table)
+\f[V]csv\f[R] (CSV table)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]docbook\f[R] (DocBook)
+\f[V]docbook\f[R] (DocBook)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]docx\f[R] (Word docx)
+\f[V]docx\f[R] (Word docx)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]dokuwiki\f[R] (DokuWiki markup)
+\f[V]dokuwiki\f[R] (DokuWiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]epub\f[R] (EPUB)
+\f[V]epub\f[R] (EPUB)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]fb2\f[R] (FictionBook2 e-book)
+\f[V]fb2\f[R] (FictionBook2 e-book)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]gfm\f[R] (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), or the deprecated and less
-accurate \f[C]markdown_github\f[R]; use \f[C]markdown_github\f[R] only
-if you need extensions not supported in \f[C]gfm\f[R].
+\f[V]gfm\f[R] (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), or the deprecated and less
+accurate \f[V]markdown_github\f[R]; use \f[V]markdown_github\f[R] only
+if you need extensions not supported in \f[V]gfm\f[R].
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]haddock\f[R] (Haddock markup)
+\f[V]haddock\f[R] (Haddock markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]html\f[R] (HTML)
+\f[V]html\f[R] (HTML)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]ipynb\f[R] (Jupyter notebook)
+\f[V]ipynb\f[R] (Jupyter notebook)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]jats\f[R] (JATS XML)
+\f[V]jats\f[R] (JATS XML)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]jira\f[R] (Jira/Confluence wiki markup)
+\f[V]jira\f[R] (Jira/Confluence wiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]json\f[R] (JSON version of native AST)
+\f[V]json\f[R] (JSON version of native AST)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]latex\f[R] (LaTeX)
+\f[V]latex\f[R] (LaTeX)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown\f[R] (Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown)
+\f[V]markdown\f[R] (Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_mmd\f[R] (MultiMarkdown)
+\f[V]markdown_mmd\f[R] (MultiMarkdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_phpextra\f[R] (PHP Markdown Extra)
+\f[V]markdown_phpextra\f[R] (PHP Markdown Extra)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_strict\f[R] (original unextended Markdown)
+\f[V]markdown_strict\f[R] (original unextended Markdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]mediawiki\f[R] (MediaWiki markup)
+\f[V]mediawiki\f[R] (MediaWiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]man\f[R] (roff man)
+\f[V]man\f[R] (roff man)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]muse\f[R] (Muse)
+\f[V]muse\f[R] (Muse)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]native\f[R] (native Haskell)
+\f[V]native\f[R] (native Haskell)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]odt\f[R] (ODT)
+\f[V]odt\f[R] (ODT)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]opml\f[R] (OPML)
+\f[V]opml\f[R] (OPML)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]org\f[R] (Emacs Org mode)
+\f[V]org\f[R] (Emacs Org mode)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]rtf\f[R] (Rich Text Format)
+\f[V]rtf\f[R] (Rich Text Format)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]rst\f[R] (reStructuredText)
+\f[V]rst\f[R] (reStructuredText)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]t2t\f[R] (txt2tags)
+\f[V]t2t\f[R] (txt2tags)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]textile\f[R] (Textile)
+\f[V]textile\f[R] (Textile)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]tikiwiki\f[R] (TikiWiki markup)
+\f[V]tikiwiki\f[R] (TikiWiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]twiki\f[R] (TWiki markup)
+\f[V]twiki\f[R] (TWiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]vimwiki\f[R] (Vimwiki)
+\f[V]vimwiki\f[R] (Vimwiki)
.IP \[bu] 2
the path of a custom Lua reader, see Custom readers and writers below
.PP
Extensions can be individually enabled or disabled by appending
-\f[C]+EXTENSION\f[R] or \f[C]-EXTENSION\f[R] to the format name.
+\f[V]+EXTENSION\f[R] or \f[V]-EXTENSION\f[R] to the format name.
See Extensions below, for a list of extensions and their names.
-See \f[C]--list-input-formats\f[R] and \f[C]--list-extensions\f[R],
+See \f[V]--list-input-formats\f[R] and \f[V]--list-extensions\f[R],
below.
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-t\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]-w\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--to=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--write=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]
+\f[V]-t\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[V]-w\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[V]--to=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[V]--write=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]
Specify output format.
\f[I]FORMAT\f[R] can be:
.RS
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]asciidoc\f[R] (AsciiDoc) or \f[C]asciidoctor\f[R] (AsciiDoctor)
+\f[V]asciidoc\f[R] (AsciiDoc) or \f[V]asciidoctor\f[R] (AsciiDoctor)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]beamer\f[R] (LaTeX beamer slide show)
+\f[V]beamer\f[R] (LaTeX beamer slide show)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]bibtex\f[R] (BibTeX bibliography)
+\f[V]bibtex\f[R] (BibTeX bibliography)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]biblatex\f[R] (BibLaTeX bibliography)
+\f[V]biblatex\f[R] (BibLaTeX bibliography)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]commonmark\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown)
+\f[V]commonmark\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]commonmark_x\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown with extensions)
+\f[V]commonmark_x\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown with extensions)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]context\f[R] (ConTeXt)
+\f[V]context\f[R] (ConTeXt)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]csljson\f[R] (CSL JSON bibliography)
+\f[V]csljson\f[R] (CSL JSON bibliography)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]docbook\f[R] or \f[C]docbook4\f[R] (DocBook 4)
+\f[V]docbook\f[R] or \f[V]docbook4\f[R] (DocBook 4)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]docbook5\f[R] (DocBook 5)
+\f[V]docbook5\f[R] (DocBook 5)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]docx\f[R] (Word docx)
+\f[V]docx\f[R] (Word docx)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]dokuwiki\f[R] (DokuWiki markup)
+\f[V]dokuwiki\f[R] (DokuWiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]epub\f[R] or \f[C]epub3\f[R] (EPUB v3 book)
+\f[V]epub\f[R] or \f[V]epub3\f[R] (EPUB v3 book)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]epub2\f[R] (EPUB v2)
+\f[V]epub2\f[R] (EPUB v2)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]fb2\f[R] (FictionBook2 e-book)
+\f[V]fb2\f[R] (FictionBook2 e-book)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]gfm\f[R] (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), or the deprecated and less
-accurate \f[C]markdown_github\f[R]; use \f[C]markdown_github\f[R] only
-if you need extensions not supported in \f[C]gfm\f[R].
+\f[V]gfm\f[R] (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), or the deprecated and less
+accurate \f[V]markdown_github\f[R]; use \f[V]markdown_github\f[R] only
+if you need extensions not supported in \f[V]gfm\f[R].
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]haddock\f[R] (Haddock markup)
+\f[V]haddock\f[R] (Haddock markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]html\f[R] or \f[C]html5\f[R] (HTML, i.e.\ HTML5/XHTML polyglot
+\f[V]html\f[R] or \f[V]html5\f[R] (HTML, i.e.\ HTML5/XHTML polyglot
markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]html4\f[R] (XHTML 1.0 Transitional)
+\f[V]html4\f[R] (XHTML 1.0 Transitional)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]icml\f[R] (InDesign ICML)
+\f[V]icml\f[R] (InDesign ICML)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]ipynb\f[R] (Jupyter notebook)
+\f[V]ipynb\f[R] (Jupyter notebook)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]jats_archiving\f[R] (JATS XML, Archiving and Interchange Tag Set)
+\f[V]jats_archiving\f[R] (JATS XML, Archiving and Interchange Tag Set)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]jats_articleauthoring\f[R] (JATS XML, Article Authoring Tag Set)
+\f[V]jats_articleauthoring\f[R] (JATS XML, Article Authoring Tag Set)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]jats_publishing\f[R] (JATS XML, Journal Publishing Tag Set)
+\f[V]jats_publishing\f[R] (JATS XML, Journal Publishing Tag Set)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]jats\f[R] (alias for \f[C]jats_archiving\f[R])
+\f[V]jats\f[R] (alias for \f[V]jats_archiving\f[R])
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]jira\f[R] (Jira/Confluence wiki markup)
+\f[V]jira\f[R] (Jira/Confluence wiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]json\f[R] (JSON version of native AST)
+\f[V]json\f[R] (JSON version of native AST)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]latex\f[R] (LaTeX)
+\f[V]latex\f[R] (LaTeX)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]man\f[R] (roff man)
+\f[V]man\f[R] (roff man)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown\f[R] (Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown)
+\f[V]markdown\f[R] (Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_mmd\f[R] (MultiMarkdown)
+\f[V]markdown_mmd\f[R] (MultiMarkdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_phpextra\f[R] (PHP Markdown Extra)
+\f[V]markdown_phpextra\f[R] (PHP Markdown Extra)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_strict\f[R] (original unextended Markdown)
+\f[V]markdown_strict\f[R] (original unextended Markdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markua\f[R] (Markua)
+\f[V]markua\f[R] (Markua)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]mediawiki\f[R] (MediaWiki markup)
+\f[V]mediawiki\f[R] (MediaWiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]ms\f[R] (roff ms)
+\f[V]ms\f[R] (roff ms)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]muse\f[R] (Muse),
+\f[V]muse\f[R] (Muse),
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]native\f[R] (native Haskell),
+\f[V]native\f[R] (native Haskell),
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]odt\f[R] (OpenOffice text document)
+\f[V]odt\f[R] (OpenOffice text document)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]opml\f[R] (OPML)
+\f[V]opml\f[R] (OPML)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]opendocument\f[R] (OpenDocument)
+\f[V]opendocument\f[R] (OpenDocument)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]org\f[R] (Emacs Org mode)
+\f[V]org\f[R] (Emacs Org mode)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]pdf\f[R] (PDF)
+\f[V]pdf\f[R] (PDF)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]plain\f[R] (plain text),
+\f[V]plain\f[R] (plain text),
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]pptx\f[R] (PowerPoint slide show)
+\f[V]pptx\f[R] (PowerPoint slide show)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]rst\f[R] (reStructuredText)
+\f[V]rst\f[R] (reStructuredText)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]rtf\f[R] (Rich Text Format)
+\f[V]rtf\f[R] (Rich Text Format)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]texinfo\f[R] (GNU Texinfo)
+\f[V]texinfo\f[R] (GNU Texinfo)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]textile\f[R] (Textile)
+\f[V]textile\f[R] (Textile)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]slideous\f[R] (Slideous HTML and JavaScript slide show)
+\f[V]slideous\f[R] (Slideous HTML and JavaScript slide show)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]slidy\f[R] (Slidy HTML and JavaScript slide show)
+\f[V]slidy\f[R] (Slidy HTML and JavaScript slide show)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]dzslides\f[R] (DZSlides HTML5 + JavaScript slide show),
+\f[V]dzslides\f[R] (DZSlides HTML5 + JavaScript slide show),
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]revealjs\f[R] (reveal.js HTML5 + JavaScript slide show)
+\f[V]revealjs\f[R] (reveal.js HTML5 + JavaScript slide show)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]s5\f[R] (S5 HTML and JavaScript slide show)
+\f[V]s5\f[R] (S5 HTML and JavaScript slide show)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]tei\f[R] (TEI Simple)
+\f[V]tei\f[R] (TEI Simple)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]xwiki\f[R] (XWiki markup)
+\f[V]xwiki\f[R] (XWiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]zimwiki\f[R] (ZimWiki markup)
+\f[V]zimwiki\f[R] (ZimWiki markup)
.IP \[bu] 2
the path of a custom Lua writer, see Custom readers and writers below
.PP
-Note that \f[C]odt\f[R], \f[C]docx\f[R], \f[C]epub\f[R], and
-\f[C]pdf\f[R] output will not be directed to \f[I]stdout\f[R] unless
-forced with \f[C]-o -\f[R].
+Note that \f[V]odt\f[R], \f[V]docx\f[R], \f[V]epub\f[R], and
+\f[V]pdf\f[R] output will not be directed to \f[I]stdout\f[R] unless
+forced with \f[V]-o -\f[R].
.PP
Extensions can be individually enabled or disabled by appending
-\f[C]+EXTENSION\f[R] or \f[C]-EXTENSION\f[R] to the format name.
+\f[V]+EXTENSION\f[R] or \f[V]-EXTENSION\f[R] to the format name.
See Extensions below, for a list of extensions and their names.
-See \f[C]--list-output-formats\f[R] and \f[C]--list-extensions\f[R],
+See \f[V]--list-output-formats\f[R] and \f[V]--list-extensions\f[R],
below.
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-o\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--output=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]-o\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[V]--output=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Write output to \f[I]FILE\f[R] instead of \f[I]stdout\f[R].
-If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is \f[C]-\f[R], output will go to \f[I]stdout\f[R],
-even if a non-textual format (\f[C]docx\f[R], \f[C]odt\f[R],
-\f[C]epub2\f[R], \f[C]epub3\f[R]) is specified.
+If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is \f[V]-\f[R], output will go to \f[I]stdout\f[R],
+even if a non-textual format (\f[V]docx\f[R], \f[V]odt\f[R],
+\f[V]epub2\f[R], \f[V]epub3\f[R]) is specified.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--data-dir=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]DIRECTORY\f[R]
+\f[V]--data-dir=\f[R]\f[I]DIRECTORY\f[R]
Specify the user data directory to search for pandoc data files.
If this option is not specified, the default user data directory will be
used.
-On *nix and macOS systems this will be the \f[C]pandoc\f[R] subdirectory
-of the XDG data directory (by default, \f[C]$HOME/.local/share\f[R],
-overridable by setting the \f[C]XDG_DATA_HOME\f[R] environment
+On *nix and macOS systems this will be the \f[V]pandoc\f[R] subdirectory
+of the XDG data directory (by default, \f[V]$HOME/.local/share\f[R],
+overridable by setting the \f[V]XDG_DATA_HOME\f[R] environment
variable).
-If that directory does not exist and \f[C]$HOME/.pandoc\f[R] exists, it
+If that directory does not exist and \f[V]$HOME/.pandoc\f[R] exists, it
will be used (for backwards compatibility).
On Windows the default user data directory is
-\f[C]C:\[rs]Users\[rs]USERNAME\[rs]AppData\[rs]Roaming\[rs]pandoc\f[R].
+\f[V]C:\[rs]Users\[rs]USERNAME\[rs]AppData\[rs]Roaming\[rs]pandoc\f[R].
You can find the default user data directory on your system by looking
-at the output of \f[C]pandoc --version\f[R].
+at the output of \f[V]pandoc --version\f[R].
Data files placed in this directory (for example,
-\f[C]reference.odt\f[R], \f[C]reference.docx\f[R], \f[C]epub.css\f[R],
-\f[C]templates\f[R]) will override pandoc\[cq]s normal defaults.
+\f[V]reference.odt\f[R], \f[V]reference.docx\f[R], \f[V]epub.css\f[R],
+\f[V]templates\f[R]) will override pandoc\[cq]s normal defaults.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-d\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--defaults=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]-d\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[V]--defaults=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Specify a set of default option settings.
\f[I]FILE\f[R] is a YAML file whose fields correspond to command-line
option settings.
All options for document conversion, including input and output files,
can be set using a defaults file.
The file will be searched for first in the working directory, and then
-in the \f[C]defaults\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory (see
-\f[C]--data-dir\f[R]).
-The \f[C].yaml\f[R] extension may be omitted.
+in the \f[V]defaults\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory (see
+\f[V]--data-dir\f[R]).
+The \f[V].yaml\f[R] extension may be omitted.
See the section Defaults files for more information on the file format.
Settings from the defaults file may be overridden or extended by
subsequent options on the command line.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--bash-completion\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--bash-completion\f[R]
Generate a bash completion script.
To enable bash completion with pandoc, add this to your
-\f[C].bashrc\f[R]:
+\f[V].bashrc\f[R]:
.RS
.IP
.nf
@@ -499,95 +513,95 @@ eval \[dq]$(pandoc --bash-completion)\[dq]
.fi
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--verbose\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--verbose\f[R]
Give verbose debugging output.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--quiet\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--quiet\f[R]
Suppress warning messages.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--fail-if-warnings\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--fail-if-warnings\f[R]
Exit with error status if there are any warnings.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--log=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--log=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Write log messages in machine-readable JSON format to \f[I]FILE\f[R].
All messages above DEBUG level will be written, regardless of verbosity
-settings (\f[C]--verbose\f[R], \f[C]--quiet\f[R]).
+settings (\f[V]--verbose\f[R], \f[V]--quiet\f[R]).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--list-input-formats\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--list-input-formats\f[R]
List supported input formats, one per line.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--list-output-formats\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--list-output-formats\f[R]
List supported output formats, one per line.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--list-extensions\f[B]\f[R][\f[B]\f[CB]=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]]
+\f[V]--list-extensions\f[R][\f[V]=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]]
List supported extensions for \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], one per line, preceded
-by a \f[C]+\f[R] or \f[C]-\f[R] indicating whether it is enabled by
+by a \f[V]+\f[R] or \f[V]-\f[R] indicating whether it is enabled by
default in \f[I]FORMAT\f[R].
If \f[I]FORMAT\f[R] is not specified, defaults for pandoc\[cq]s Markdown
are given.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--list-highlight-languages\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--list-highlight-languages\f[R]
List supported languages for syntax highlighting, one per line.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--list-highlight-styles\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--list-highlight-styles\f[R]
List supported styles for syntax highlighting, one per line.
-See \f[C]--highlight-style\f[R].
+See \f[V]--highlight-style\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-v\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--version\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]-v\f[R], \f[V]--version\f[R]
Print version.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-h\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--help\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]-h\f[R], \f[V]--help\f[R]
Show usage message.
.SS Reader options
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--shift-heading-level-by=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[V]--shift-heading-level-by=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
Shift heading levels by a positive or negative integer.
-For example, with \f[C]--shift-heading-level-by=-1\f[R], level 2
+For example, with \f[V]--shift-heading-level-by=-1\f[R], level 2
headings become level 1 headings, and level 3 headings become level 2
headings.
Headings cannot have a level less than 1, so a heading that would be
shifted below level 1 becomes a regular paragraph.
Exception: with a shift of -N, a level-N heading at the beginning of the
document replaces the metadata title.
-\f[C]--shift-heading-level-by=-1\f[R] is a good choice when converting
+\f[V]--shift-heading-level-by=-1\f[R] is a good choice when converting
HTML or Markdown documents that use an initial level-1 heading for the
document title and level-2+ headings for sections.
-\f[C]--shift-heading-level-by=1\f[R] may be a good choice for converting
+\f[V]--shift-heading-level-by=1\f[R] may be a good choice for converting
Markdown documents that use level-1 headings for sections to HTML, since
pandoc uses a level-1 heading to render the document title.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--base-header-level=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[V]--base-header-level=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
\f[I]Deprecated.
-Use \f[CI]--shift-heading-level-by\f[I]=X instead, where X = NUMBER -
+Use \f[VI]--shift-heading-level-by\f[I]=X instead, where X = NUMBER -
1.\f[R] Specify the base level for headings (defaults to 1).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--strip-empty-paragraphs\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--strip-empty-paragraphs\f[R]
\f[I]Deprecated.
-Use the \f[CI]+empty_paragraphs\f[I] extension instead.\f[R] Ignore
+Use the \f[VI]+empty_paragraphs\f[I] extension instead.\f[R] Ignore
paragraphs with no content.
This option is useful for converting word processing documents where
users have used empty paragraphs to create inter-paragraph space.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--indented-code-classes=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]CLASSES\f[R]
+\f[V]--indented-code-classes=\f[R]\f[I]CLASSES\f[R]
Specify classes to use for indented code blocks\[en]for example,
-\f[C]perl,numberLines\f[R] or \f[C]haskell\f[R].
+\f[V]perl,numberLines\f[R] or \f[V]haskell\f[R].
Multiple classes may be separated by spaces or commas.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--default-image-extension=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]EXTENSION\f[R]
+\f[V]--default-image-extension=\f[R]\f[I]EXTENSION\f[R]
Specify a default extension to use when image paths/URLs have no
extension.
This allows you to use the same source for formats that require
different kinds of images.
Currently this option only affects the Markdown and LaTeX readers.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--file-scope\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--file-scope\f[R]
Parse each file individually before combining for multifile documents.
This will allow footnotes in different files with the same identifiers
to work as expected.
If this option is set, footnotes and links will not work across files.
-Reading binary files (docx, odt, epub) implies \f[C]--file-scope\f[R].
+Reading binary files (docx, odt, epub) implies \f[V]--file-scope\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-F\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]PROGRAM\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--filter=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]PROGRAM\f[R]
+\f[V]-F\f[R] \f[I]PROGRAM\f[R], \f[V]--filter=\f[R]\f[I]PROGRAM\f[R]
Specify an executable to be used as a filter transforming the pandoc AST
after the input is parsed and before the output is written.
The executable should read JSON from stdin and write JSON to stdout.
@@ -614,10 +628,10 @@ pandoc -t json | ./caps.py latex | pandoc -f json -t latex
The latter form may be useful for debugging filters.
.PP
Filters may be written in any language.
-\f[C]Text.Pandoc.JSON\f[R] exports \f[C]toJSONFilter\f[R] to facilitate
+\f[V]Text.Pandoc.JSON\f[R] exports \f[V]toJSONFilter\f[R] to facilitate
writing filters in Haskell.
Those who would prefer to write filters in python can use the module
-\f[C]pandocfilters\f[R], installable from PyPI.
+\f[V]pandocfilters\f[R], installable from PyPI.
There are also pandoc filter libraries in PHP, perl, and
JavaScript/node.js.
.PP
@@ -625,19 +639,19 @@ In order of preference, pandoc will look for filters in
.IP "1." 3
a specified full or relative path (executable or non-executable)
.IP "2." 3
-\f[C]$DATADIR/filters\f[R] (executable or non-executable) where
-\f[C]$DATADIR\f[R] is the user data directory (see \f[C]--data-dir\f[R],
+\f[V]$DATADIR/filters\f[R] (executable or non-executable) where
+\f[V]$DATADIR\f[R] is the user data directory (see \f[V]--data-dir\f[R],
above).
.IP "3." 3
-\f[C]$PATH\f[R] (executable only)
+\f[V]$PATH\f[R] (executable only)
.PP
Filters, Lua-filters, and citeproc processing are applied in the order
specified on the command line.
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-L\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]SCRIPT\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--lua-filter=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]SCRIPT\f[R]
+\f[V]-L\f[R] \f[I]SCRIPT\f[R], \f[V]--lua-filter=\f[R]\f[I]SCRIPT\f[R]
Transform the document in a similar fashion as JSON filters (see
-\f[C]--filter\f[R]), but use pandoc\[cq]s built-in Lua filtering system.
+\f[V]--filter\f[R]), but use pandoc\[cq]s built-in Lua filtering system.
The given Lua script is expected to return a list of Lua filters which
will be applied in order.
Each Lua filter must contain element-transforming functions indexed by
@@ -645,7 +659,7 @@ the name of the AST element on which the filter function should be
applied.
.RS
.PP
-The \f[C]pandoc\f[R] Lua module provides helper functions for element
+The \f[V]pandoc\f[R] Lua module provides helper functions for element
creation.
It is always loaded into the script\[cq]s Lua environment.
.PP
@@ -655,27 +669,27 @@ In order of preference, pandoc will look for Lua filters in
.IP "1." 3
a specified full or relative path
.IP "2." 3
-\f[C]$DATADIR/filters\f[R] where \f[C]$DATADIR\f[R] is the user data
-directory (see \f[C]--data-dir\f[R], above).
+\f[V]$DATADIR/filters\f[R] where \f[V]$DATADIR\f[R] is the user data
+directory (see \f[V]--data-dir\f[R], above).
.PP
Filters, Lua filters, and citeproc processing are applied in the order
specified on the command line.
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-M\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[B]\f[CB]=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]], \f[B]\f[CB]--metadata=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[B]\f[CB]:\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]]
+\f[V]-M\f[R] \f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[V]=\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]], \f[V]--metadata=\f[R]\f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[V]:\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]]
Set the metadata field \f[I]KEY\f[R] to the value \f[I]VAL\f[R].
A value specified on the command line overrides a value specified in the
document using YAML metadata blocks.
Values will be parsed as YAML boolean or string values.
If no value is specified, the value will be treated as Boolean true.
-Like \f[C]--variable\f[R], \f[C]--metadata\f[R] causes template
+Like \f[V]--variable\f[R], \f[V]--metadata\f[R] causes template
variables to be set.
-But unlike \f[C]--variable\f[R], \f[C]--metadata\f[R] affects the
+But unlike \f[V]--variable\f[R], \f[V]--metadata\f[R] affects the
metadata of the underlying document (which is accessible from filters
and may be printed in some output formats) and metadata values will be
escaped when inserted into the template.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--metadata-file=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--metadata-file=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Read metadata from the supplied YAML (or JSON) file.
This option can be used with every input format, but string scalars in
the YAML file will always be parsed as Markdown.
@@ -684,43 +698,43 @@ blocks.
This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple metadata files;
values in files specified later on the command line will be preferred
over those specified in earlier files.
-Metadata values specified inside the document, or by using \f[C]-M\f[R],
+Metadata values specified inside the document, or by using \f[V]-M\f[R],
overwrite values specified with this option.
The file will be searched for first in the working directory, and then
-in the \f[C]metadata\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory (see
-\f[C]--data-dir\f[R]).
+in the \f[V]metadata\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory (see
+\f[V]--data-dir\f[R]).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-p\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--preserve-tabs\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]-p\f[R], \f[V]--preserve-tabs\f[R]
Preserve tabs instead of converting them to spaces.
(By default, pandoc converts tabs to spaces before parsing its input.)
Note that this will only affect tabs in literal code spans and code
blocks.
Tabs in regular text are always treated as spaces.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--tab-stop=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[V]--tab-stop=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
Specify the number of spaces per tab (default is 4).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--track-changes=accept\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]reject\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]all\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--track-changes=accept\f[R]|\f[V]reject\f[R]|\f[V]all\f[R]
Specifies what to do with insertions, deletions, and comments produced
by the MS Word \[lq]Track Changes\[rq] feature.
-\f[C]accept\f[R] (the default) processes all the insertions and
+\f[V]accept\f[R] (the default) processes all the insertions and
deletions.
-\f[C]reject\f[R] ignores them.
-Both \f[C]accept\f[R] and \f[C]reject\f[R] ignore comments.
-\f[C]all\f[R] includes all insertions, deletions, and comments, wrapped
-in spans with \f[C]insertion\f[R], \f[C]deletion\f[R],
-\f[C]comment-start\f[R], and \f[C]comment-end\f[R] classes,
+\f[V]reject\f[R] ignores them.
+Both \f[V]accept\f[R] and \f[V]reject\f[R] ignore comments.
+\f[V]all\f[R] includes all insertions, deletions, and comments, wrapped
+in spans with \f[V]insertion\f[R], \f[V]deletion\f[R],
+\f[V]comment-start\f[R], and \f[V]comment-end\f[R] classes,
respectively.
The author and time of change is included.
-\f[C]all\f[R] is useful for scripting: only accepting changes from a
+\f[V]all\f[R] is useful for scripting: only accepting changes from a
certain reviewer, say, or before a certain date.
-If a paragraph is inserted or deleted, \f[C]track-changes=all\f[R]
+If a paragraph is inserted or deleted, \f[V]track-changes=all\f[R]
produces a span with the class
-\f[C]paragraph-insertion\f[R]/\f[C]paragraph-deletion\f[R] before the
+\f[V]paragraph-insertion\f[R]/\f[V]paragraph-deletion\f[R] before the
affected paragraph break.
This option only affects the docx reader.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--extract-media=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]DIR\f[R]
+\f[V]--extract-media=\f[R]\f[I]DIR\f[R]
Extract images and other media contained in or linked from the source
document to the path \f[I]DIR\f[R], creating it if necessary, and adjust
the images references in the document so they point to the extracted
@@ -728,88 +742,88 @@ files.
Media are downloaded, read from the file system, or extracted from a
binary container (e.g.\ docx), as needed.
The original file paths are used if they are relative paths not
-containing \f[C]..\f[R].
+containing \f[V]..\f[R].
Otherwise filenames are constructed from the SHA1 hash of the contents.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--abbreviations=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--abbreviations=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Specifies a custom abbreviations file, with abbreviations one to a line.
If this option is not specified, pandoc will read the data file
-\f[C]abbreviations\f[R] from the user data directory or fall back on a
+\f[V]abbreviations\f[R] from the user data directory or fall back on a
system default.
To see the system default, use
-\f[C]pandoc --print-default-data-file=abbreviations\f[R].
+\f[V]pandoc --print-default-data-file=abbreviations\f[R].
The only use pandoc makes of this list is in the Markdown reader.
Strings found in this list will be followed by a nonbreaking space, and
the period will not produce sentence-ending space in formats like LaTeX.
The strings may not contain spaces.
.SS General writer options
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-s\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--standalone\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]-s\f[R], \f[V]--standalone\f[R]
Produce output with an appropriate header and footer (e.g.\ a standalone
HTML, LaTeX, TEI, or RTF file, not a fragment).
-This option is set automatically for \f[C]pdf\f[R], \f[C]epub\f[R],
-\f[C]epub3\f[R], \f[C]fb2\f[R], \f[C]docx\f[R], and \f[C]odt\f[R]
+This option is set automatically for \f[V]pdf\f[R], \f[V]epub\f[R],
+\f[V]epub3\f[R], \f[V]fb2\f[R], \f[V]docx\f[R], and \f[V]odt\f[R]
output.
-For \f[C]native\f[R] output, this option causes metadata to be included;
+For \f[V]native\f[R] output, this option causes metadata to be included;
otherwise, metadata is suppressed.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--template=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
+\f[V]--template=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
Use the specified file as a custom template for the generated document.
-Implies \f[C]--standalone\f[R].
+Implies \f[V]--standalone\f[R].
See Templates, below, for a description of template syntax.
If no extension is specified, an extension corresponding to the writer
-will be added, so that \f[C]--template=special\f[R] looks for
-\f[C]special.html\f[R] for HTML output.
+will be added, so that \f[V]--template=special\f[R] looks for
+\f[V]special.html\f[R] for HTML output.
If the template is not found, pandoc will search for it in the
-\f[C]templates\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory (see
-\f[C]--data-dir\f[R]).
+\f[V]templates\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory (see
+\f[V]--data-dir\f[R]).
If this option is not used, a default template appropriate for the
-output format will be used (see \f[C]-D/--print-default-template\f[R]).
+output format will be used (see \f[V]-D/--print-default-template\f[R]).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-V\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[B]\f[CB]=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]], \f[B]\f[CB]--variable=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[B]\f[CB]:\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]]
+\f[V]-V\f[R] \f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[V]=\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]], \f[V]--variable=\f[R]\f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[V]:\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]]
Set the template variable \f[I]KEY\f[R] to the value \f[I]VAL\f[R] when
rendering the document in standalone mode.
If no \f[I]VAL\f[R] is specified, the key will be given the value
-\f[C]true\f[R].
+\f[V]true\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--sandbox\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--sandbox\f[R]
Run pandoc in a sandbox, limiting IO operations in readers and writers
to reading the files specified on the command line.
Note that this option does not limit IO operations by filters or in the
production of PDF documents.
But it does offer security against, for example, disclosure of files
-through the use of \f[C]include\f[R] directives.
+through the use of \f[V]include\f[R] directives.
Anyone using pandoc on untrusted user input should use this option.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-D\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--print-default-template=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]
+\f[V]-D\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[V]--print-default-template=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]
Print the system default template for an output \f[I]FORMAT\f[R].
-(See \f[C]-t\f[R] for a list of possible \f[I]FORMAT\f[R]s.)
+(See \f[V]-t\f[R] for a list of possible \f[I]FORMAT\f[R]s.)
Templates in the user data directory are ignored.
-This option may be used with \f[C]-o\f[R]/\f[C]--output\f[R] to redirect
-output to a file, but \f[C]-o\f[R]/\f[C]--output\f[R] must come before
-\f[C]--print-default-template\f[R] on the command line.
+This option may be used with \f[V]-o\f[R]/\f[V]--output\f[R] to redirect
+output to a file, but \f[V]-o\f[R]/\f[V]--output\f[R] must come before
+\f[V]--print-default-template\f[R] on the command line.
.RS
.PP
Note that some of the default templates use partials, for example
-\f[C]styles.html\f[R].
-To print the partials, use \f[C]--print-default-data-file\f[R]: for
-example, \f[C]--print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html\f[R].
+\f[V]styles.html\f[R].
+To print the partials, use \f[V]--print-default-data-file\f[R]: for
+example, \f[V]--print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html\f[R].
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--print-default-data-file=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--print-default-data-file=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Print a system default data file.
Files in the user data directory are ignored.
-This option may be used with \f[C]-o\f[R]/\f[C]--output\f[R] to redirect
-output to a file, but \f[C]-o\f[R]/\f[C]--output\f[R] must come before
-\f[C]--print-default-data-file\f[R] on the command line.
+This option may be used with \f[V]-o\f[R]/\f[V]--output\f[R] to redirect
+output to a file, but \f[V]-o\f[R]/\f[V]--output\f[R] must come before
+\f[V]--print-default-data-file\f[R] on the command line.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--eol=crlf\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]lf\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]native\f[B]\f[R]
-Manually specify line endings: \f[C]crlf\f[R] (Windows), \f[C]lf\f[R]
-(macOS/Linux/UNIX), or \f[C]native\f[R] (line endings appropriate to the
+\f[V]--eol=crlf\f[R]|\f[V]lf\f[R]|\f[V]native\f[R]
+Manually specify line endings: \f[V]crlf\f[R] (Windows), \f[V]lf\f[R]
+(macOS/Linux/UNIX), or \f[V]native\f[R] (line endings appropriate to the
OS on which pandoc is being run).
-The default is \f[C]native\f[R].
+The default is \f[V]native\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--dpi\f[B]\f[R]=\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[V]--dpi\f[R]=\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
Specify the default dpi (dots per inch) value for conversion from pixels
to inch/centimeters and vice versa.
(Technically, the correct term would be ppi: pixels per inch.)
@@ -817,179 +831,179 @@ The default is 96dpi.
When images contain information about dpi internally, the encoded value
is used instead of the default specified by this option.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--wrap=auto\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]none\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]preserve\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--wrap=auto\f[R]|\f[V]none\f[R]|\f[V]preserve\f[R]
Determine how text is wrapped in the output (the source code, not the
rendered version).
-With \f[C]auto\f[R] (the default), pandoc will attempt to wrap lines to
-the column width specified by \f[C]--columns\f[R] (default 72).
-With \f[C]none\f[R], pandoc will not wrap lines at all.
-With \f[C]preserve\f[R], pandoc will attempt to preserve the wrapping
+With \f[V]auto\f[R] (the default), pandoc will attempt to wrap lines to
+the column width specified by \f[V]--columns\f[R] (default 72).
+With \f[V]none\f[R], pandoc will not wrap lines at all.
+With \f[V]preserve\f[R], pandoc will attempt to preserve the wrapping
from the source document (that is, where there are nonsemantic newlines
in the source, there will be nonsemantic newlines in the output as
well).
-In \f[C]ipynb\f[R] output, this option affects wrapping of the contents
+In \f[V]ipynb\f[R] output, this option affects wrapping of the contents
of markdown cells.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--columns=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[V]--columns=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
Specify length of lines in characters.
This affects text wrapping in the generated source code (see
-\f[C]--wrap\f[R]).
+\f[V]--wrap\f[R]).
It also affects calculation of column widths for plain text tables (see
Tables below).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--toc\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--table-of-contents\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--toc\f[R], \f[V]--table-of-contents\f[R]
Include an automatically generated table of contents (or, in the case of
-\f[C]latex\f[R], \f[C]context\f[R], \f[C]docx\f[R], \f[C]odt\f[R],
-\f[C]opendocument\f[R], \f[C]rst\f[R], or \f[C]ms\f[R], an instruction
+\f[V]latex\f[R], \f[V]context\f[R], \f[V]docx\f[R], \f[V]odt\f[R],
+\f[V]opendocument\f[R], \f[V]rst\f[R], or \f[V]ms\f[R], an instruction
to create one) in the output document.
-This option has no effect unless \f[C]-s/--standalone\f[R] is used, and
-it has no effect on \f[C]man\f[R], \f[C]docbook4\f[R],
-\f[C]docbook5\f[R], or \f[C]jats\f[R] output.
+This option has no effect unless \f[V]-s/--standalone\f[R] is used, and
+it has no effect on \f[V]man\f[R], \f[V]docbook4\f[R],
+\f[V]docbook5\f[R], or \f[V]jats\f[R] output.
.RS
.PP
-Note that if you are producing a PDF via \f[C]ms\f[R], the table of
+Note that if you are producing a PDF via \f[V]ms\f[R], the table of
contents will appear at the beginning of the document, before the title.
If you would prefer it to be at the end of the document, use the option
-\f[C]--pdf-engine-opt=--no-toc-relocation\f[R].
+\f[V]--pdf-engine-opt=--no-toc-relocation\f[R].
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--toc-depth=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[V]--toc-depth=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
Specify the number of section levels to include in the table of
contents.
The default is 3 (which means that level-1, 2, and 3 headings will be
listed in the contents).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--strip-comments\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--strip-comments\f[R]
Strip out HTML comments in the Markdown or Textile source, rather than
passing them on to Markdown, Textile or HTML output as raw HTML.
This does not apply to HTML comments inside raw HTML blocks when the
-\f[C]markdown_in_html_blocks\f[R] extension is not set.
+\f[V]markdown_in_html_blocks\f[R] extension is not set.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--no-highlight\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--no-highlight\f[R]
Disables syntax highlighting for code blocks and inlines, even when a
language attribute is given.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--highlight-style=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]STYLE\f[R]|\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--highlight-style=\f[R]\f[I]STYLE\f[R]|\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Specifies the coloring style to be used in highlighted source code.
-Options are \f[C]pygments\f[R] (the default), \f[C]kate\f[R],
-\f[C]monochrome\f[R], \f[C]breezeDark\f[R], \f[C]espresso\f[R],
-\f[C]zenburn\f[R], \f[C]haddock\f[R], and \f[C]tango\f[R].
+Options are \f[V]pygments\f[R] (the default), \f[V]kate\f[R],
+\f[V]monochrome\f[R], \f[V]breezeDark\f[R], \f[V]espresso\f[R],
+\f[V]zenburn\f[R], \f[V]haddock\f[R], and \f[V]tango\f[R].
For more information on syntax highlighting in pandoc, see Syntax
highlighting, below.
-See also \f[C]--list-highlight-styles\f[R].
+See also \f[V]--list-highlight-styles\f[R].
.RS
.PP
Instead of a \f[I]STYLE\f[R] name, a JSON file with extension
-\f[C].theme\f[R] may be supplied.
+\f[V].theme\f[R] may be supplied.
This will be parsed as a KDE syntax highlighting theme and (if valid)
used as the highlighting style.
.PP
To generate the JSON version of an existing style, use
-\f[C]--print-highlight-style\f[R].
+\f[V]--print-highlight-style\f[R].
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--print-highlight-style=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]STYLE\f[R]|\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--print-highlight-style=\f[R]\f[I]STYLE\f[R]|\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Prints a JSON version of a highlighting style, which can be modified,
-saved with a \f[C].theme\f[R] extension, and used with
-\f[C]--highlight-style\f[R].
-This option may be used with \f[C]-o\f[R]/\f[C]--output\f[R] to redirect
-output to a file, but \f[C]-o\f[R]/\f[C]--output\f[R] must come before
-\f[C]--print-highlight-style\f[R] on the command line.
+saved with a \f[V].theme\f[R] extension, and used with
+\f[V]--highlight-style\f[R].
+This option may be used with \f[V]-o\f[R]/\f[V]--output\f[R] to redirect
+output to a file, but \f[V]-o\f[R]/\f[V]--output\f[R] must come before
+\f[V]--print-highlight-style\f[R] on the command line.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--syntax-definition=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--syntax-definition=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Instructs pandoc to load a KDE XML syntax definition file, which will be
used for syntax highlighting of appropriately marked code blocks.
This can be used to add support for new languages or to use altered
syntax definitions for existing languages.
This option may be repeated to add multiple syntax definitions.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-H\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--include-in-header=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
+\f[V]-H\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[V]--include-in-header=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
Include contents of \f[I]FILE\f[R], verbatim, at the end of the header.
This can be used, for example, to include special CSS or JavaScript in
HTML documents.
This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple files in the
header.
They will be included in the order specified.
-Implies \f[C]--standalone\f[R].
+Implies \f[V]--standalone\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-B\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--include-before-body=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
+\f[V]-B\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[V]--include-before-body=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
Include contents of \f[I]FILE\f[R], verbatim, at the beginning of the
-document body (e.g.\ after the \f[C]<body>\f[R] tag in HTML, or the
-\f[C]\[rs]begin{document}\f[R] command in LaTeX).
+document body (e.g.\ after the \f[V]<body>\f[R] tag in HTML, or the
+\f[V]\[rs]begin{document}\f[R] command in LaTeX).
This can be used to include navigation bars or banners in HTML
documents.
This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple files.
They will be included in the order specified.
-Implies \f[C]--standalone\f[R].
+Implies \f[V]--standalone\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-A\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--include-after-body=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
+\f[V]-A\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[V]--include-after-body=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
Include contents of \f[I]FILE\f[R], verbatim, at the end of the document
-body (before the \f[C]</body>\f[R] tag in HTML, or the
-\f[C]\[rs]end{document}\f[R] command in LaTeX).
+body (before the \f[V]</body>\f[R] tag in HTML, or the
+\f[V]\[rs]end{document}\f[R] command in LaTeX).
This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple files.
They will be included in the order specified.
-Implies \f[C]--standalone\f[R].
+Implies \f[V]--standalone\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--resource-path=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]SEARCHPATH\f[R]
+\f[V]--resource-path=\f[R]\f[I]SEARCHPATH\f[R]
List of paths to search for images and other resources.
-The paths should be separated by \f[C]:\f[R] on Linux, UNIX, and macOS
-systems, and by \f[C];\f[R] on Windows.
-If \f[C]--resource-path\f[R] is not specified, the default resource path
+The paths should be separated by \f[V]:\f[R] on Linux, UNIX, and macOS
+systems, and by \f[V];\f[R] on Windows.
+If \f[V]--resource-path\f[R] is not specified, the default resource path
is the working directory.
-Note that, if \f[C]--resource-path\f[R] is specified, the working
+Note that, if \f[V]--resource-path\f[R] is specified, the working
directory must be explicitly listed or it will not be searched.
-For example: \f[C]--resource-path=.:test\f[R] will search the working
-directory and the \f[C]test\f[R] subdirectory, in that order.
+For example: \f[V]--resource-path=.:test\f[R] will search the working
+directory and the \f[V]test\f[R] subdirectory, in that order.
This option can be used repeatedly.
Search path components that come later on the command line will be
searched before those that come earlier, so
-\f[C]--resource-path foo:bar --resource-path baz:bim\f[R] is equivalent
-to \f[C]--resource-path baz:bim:foo:bar\f[R].
+\f[V]--resource-path foo:bar --resource-path baz:bim\f[R] is equivalent
+to \f[V]--resource-path baz:bim:foo:bar\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--request-header=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NAME\f[R]\f[B]\f[CB]:\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]
+\f[V]--request-header=\f[R]\f[I]NAME\f[R]\f[V]:\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]
Set the request header \f[I]NAME\f[R] to the value \f[I]VAL\f[R] when
making HTTP requests (for example, when a URL is given on the command
line, or when resources used in a document must be downloaded).
If you\[cq]re behind a proxy, you also need to set the environment
-variable \f[C]http_proxy\f[R] to \f[C]http://...\f[R].
+variable \f[V]http_proxy\f[R] to \f[V]http://...\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--no-check-certificate\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--no-check-certificate\f[R]
Disable the certificate verification to allow access to unsecure HTTP
resources (for example when the certificate is no longer valid or self
signed).
.SS Options affecting specific writers
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--self-contained\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--self-contained\f[R]
Produce a standalone HTML file with no external dependencies, using
-\f[C]data:\f[R] URIs to incorporate the contents of linked scripts,
+\f[V]data:\f[R] URIs to incorporate the contents of linked scripts,
stylesheets, images, and videos.
-Implies \f[C]--standalone\f[R].
+Implies \f[V]--standalone\f[R].
The resulting file should be \[lq]self-contained,\[rq] in the sense that
it needs no external files and no net access to be displayed properly by
a browser.
This option works only with HTML output formats, including
-\f[C]html4\f[R], \f[C]html5\f[R], \f[C]html+lhs\f[R],
-\f[C]html5+lhs\f[R], \f[C]s5\f[R], \f[C]slidy\f[R], \f[C]slideous\f[R],
-\f[C]dzslides\f[R], and \f[C]revealjs\f[R].
+\f[V]html4\f[R], \f[V]html5\f[R], \f[V]html+lhs\f[R],
+\f[V]html5+lhs\f[R], \f[V]s5\f[R], \f[V]slidy\f[R], \f[V]slideous\f[R],
+\f[V]dzslides\f[R], and \f[V]revealjs\f[R].
Scripts, images, and stylesheets at absolute URLs will be downloaded;
those at relative URLs will be sought relative to the working directory
(if the first source file is local) or relative to the base URL (if the
first source file is remote).
-Elements with the attribute \f[C]data-external=\[dq]1\[dq]\f[R] will be
+Elements with the attribute \f[V]data-external=\[dq]1\[dq]\f[R] will be
left alone; the documents they link to will not be incorporated in the
document.
Limitation: resources that are loaded dynamically through JavaScript
-cannot be incorporated; as a result, \f[C]--self-contained\f[R] does not
-work with \f[C]--mathjax\f[R], and some advanced features (e.g.\ zoom or
+cannot be incorporated; as a result, \f[V]--self-contained\f[R] does not
+work with \f[V]--mathjax\f[R], and some advanced features (e.g.\ zoom or
speaker notes) may not work in an offline \[lq]self-contained\[rq]
-\f[C]reveal.js\f[R] slide show.
+\f[V]reveal.js\f[R] slide show.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--html-q-tags\f[B]\f[R]
-Use \f[C]<q>\f[R] tags for quotes in HTML.
-(This option only has an effect if the \f[C]smart\f[R] extension is
+\f[V]--html-q-tags\f[R]
+Use \f[V]<q>\f[R] tags for quotes in HTML.
+(This option only has an effect if the \f[V]smart\f[R] extension is
enabled for the input format used.)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--ascii\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--ascii\f[R]
Use only ASCII characters in output.
Currently supported for XML and HTML formats (which use entities instead
of UTF-8 when this option is selected), CommonMark, gfm, and Markdown
@@ -998,84 +1012,84 @@ limited degree LaTeX (which uses standard commands for accented
characters when possible).
roff man output uses ASCII by default.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--reference-links\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--reference-links\f[R]
Use reference-style links, rather than inline links, in writing Markdown
or reStructuredText.
By default inline links are used.
The placement of link references is affected by the
-\f[C]--reference-location\f[R] option.
+\f[V]--reference-location\f[R] option.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--reference-location=block\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]section\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]document\f[B]\f[R]
-Specify whether footnotes (and references, if \f[C]reference-links\f[R]
+\f[V]--reference-location=block\f[R]|\f[V]section\f[R]|\f[V]document\f[R]
+Specify whether footnotes (and references, if \f[V]reference-links\f[R]
is set) are placed at the end of the current (top-level) block, the
current section, or the document.
-The default is \f[C]document\f[R].
-Currently this option only affects the \f[C]markdown\f[R],
-\f[C]muse\f[R], \f[C]html\f[R], \f[C]epub\f[R], \f[C]slidy\f[R],
-\f[C]s5\f[R], \f[C]slideous\f[R], \f[C]dzslides\f[R], and
-\f[C]revealjs\f[R] writers.
+The default is \f[V]document\f[R].
+Currently this option only affects the \f[V]markdown\f[R],
+\f[V]muse\f[R], \f[V]html\f[R], \f[V]epub\f[R], \f[V]slidy\f[R],
+\f[V]s5\f[R], \f[V]slideous\f[R], \f[V]dzslides\f[R], and
+\f[V]revealjs\f[R] writers.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--markdown-headings=setext\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]atx\f[B]\f[R]
-Specify whether to use ATX-style (\f[C]#\f[R]-prefixed) or Setext-style
+\f[V]--markdown-headings=setext\f[R]|\f[V]atx\f[R]
+Specify whether to use ATX-style (\f[V]#\f[R]-prefixed) or Setext-style
(underlined) headings for level 1 and 2 headings in Markdown output.
-(The default is \f[C]atx\f[R].)
+(The default is \f[V]atx\f[R].)
ATX-style headings are always used for levels 3+.
-This option also affects Markdown cells in \f[C]ipynb\f[R] output.
+This option also affects Markdown cells in \f[V]ipynb\f[R] output.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--atx-headers\f[B]\f[R]
-\f[I]Deprecated synonym for \f[CI]--markdown-headings=atx\f[I].\f[R]
+\f[V]--atx-headers\f[R]
+\f[I]Deprecated synonym for \f[VI]--markdown-headings=atx\f[I].\f[R]
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--top-level-division=default\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]section\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]chapter\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]part\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--top-level-division=default\f[R]|\f[V]section\f[R]|\f[V]chapter\f[R]|\f[V]part\f[R]
Treat top-level headings as the given division type in LaTeX, ConTeXt,
DocBook, and TEI output.
The hierarchy order is part, chapter, then section; all headings are
shifted such that the top-level heading becomes the specified type.
The default behavior is to determine the best division type via
-heuristics: unless other conditions apply, \f[C]section\f[R] is chosen.
-When the \f[C]documentclass\f[R] variable is set to \f[C]report\f[R],
-\f[C]book\f[R], or \f[C]memoir\f[R] (unless the \f[C]article\f[R] option
-is specified), \f[C]chapter\f[R] is implied as the setting for this
+heuristics: unless other conditions apply, \f[V]section\f[R] is chosen.
+When the \f[V]documentclass\f[R] variable is set to \f[V]report\f[R],
+\f[V]book\f[R], or \f[V]memoir\f[R] (unless the \f[V]article\f[R] option
+is specified), \f[V]chapter\f[R] is implied as the setting for this
option.
-If \f[C]beamer\f[R] is the output format, specifying either
-\f[C]chapter\f[R] or \f[C]part\f[R] will cause top-level headings to
-become \f[C]\[rs]part{..}\f[R], while second-level headings remain as
+If \f[V]beamer\f[R] is the output format, specifying either
+\f[V]chapter\f[R] or \f[V]part\f[R] will cause top-level headings to
+become \f[V]\[rs]part{..}\f[R], while second-level headings remain as
their default type.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-N\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--number-sections\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]-N\f[R], \f[V]--number-sections\f[R]
Number section headings in LaTeX, ConTeXt, HTML, Docx, ms, or EPUB
output.
By default, sections are not numbered.
-Sections with class \f[C]unnumbered\f[R] will never be numbered, even if
-\f[C]--number-sections\f[R] is specified.
+Sections with class \f[V]unnumbered\f[R] will never be numbered, even if
+\f[V]--number-sections\f[R] is specified.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--number-offset=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R][\f[B]\f[CB],\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]\f[B]\f[CB],\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]\&...\f[R]]
+\f[V]--number-offset=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R][\f[V],\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]\f[V],\f[R]\f[I]\&...\f[R]]
Offset for section headings in HTML output (ignored in other output
formats).
The first number is added to the section number for top-level headings,
the second for second-level headings, and so on.
So, for example, if you want the first top-level heading in your
document to be numbered \[lq]6\[rq], specify
-\f[C]--number-offset=5\f[R].
+\f[V]--number-offset=5\f[R].
If your document starts with a level-2 heading which you want to be
-numbered \[lq]1.5\[rq], specify \f[C]--number-offset=1,4\f[R].
+numbered \[lq]1.5\[rq], specify \f[V]--number-offset=1,4\f[R].
Offsets are 0 by default.
-Implies \f[C]--number-sections\f[R].
+Implies \f[V]--number-sections\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--listings\f[B]\f[R]
-Use the \f[C]listings\f[R] package for LaTeX code blocks.
+\f[V]--listings\f[R]
+Use the \f[V]listings\f[R] package for LaTeX code blocks.
The package does not support multi-byte encoding for source code.
To handle UTF-8 you would need to use a custom template.
This issue is fully documented here: Encoding issue with the listings
package.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-i\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--incremental\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]-i\f[R], \f[V]--incremental\f[R]
Make list items in slide shows display incrementally (one by one).
The default is for lists to be displayed all at once.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--slide-level=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[V]--slide-level=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
Specifies that headings with the specified level create slides (for
-\f[C]beamer\f[R], \f[C]s5\f[R], \f[C]slidy\f[R], \f[C]slideous\f[R],
-\f[C]dzslides\f[R]).
+\f[V]beamer\f[R], \f[V]s5\f[R], \f[V]slidy\f[R], \f[V]slideous\f[R],
+\f[V]dzslides\f[R]).
Headings above this level in the hierarchy are used to divide the slide
show into sections; headings below this level create subheads within a
slide.
@@ -1087,49 +1101,49 @@ If a slide level is not specified explicitly, the slide level will be
set automatically based on the contents of the document; see Structuring
the slide show.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--section-divs\f[B]\f[R]
-Wrap sections in \f[C]<section>\f[R] tags (or \f[C]<div>\f[R] tags for
-\f[C]html4\f[R]), and attach identifiers to the enclosing
-\f[C]<section>\f[R] (or \f[C]<div>\f[R]) rather than the heading itself.
+\f[V]--section-divs\f[R]
+Wrap sections in \f[V]<section>\f[R] tags (or \f[V]<div>\f[R] tags for
+\f[V]html4\f[R]), and attach identifiers to the enclosing
+\f[V]<section>\f[R] (or \f[V]<div>\f[R]) rather than the heading itself.
See Heading identifiers, below.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--email-obfuscation=none\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]javascript\f[B]\f[R]|\f[B]\f[CB]references\f[B]\f[R]
-Specify a method for obfuscating \f[C]mailto:\f[R] links in HTML
+\f[V]--email-obfuscation=none\f[R]|\f[V]javascript\f[R]|\f[V]references\f[R]
+Specify a method for obfuscating \f[V]mailto:\f[R] links in HTML
documents.
-\f[C]none\f[R] leaves \f[C]mailto:\f[R] links as they are.
-\f[C]javascript\f[R] obfuscates them using JavaScript.
-\f[C]references\f[R] obfuscates them by printing their letters as
+\f[V]none\f[R] leaves \f[V]mailto:\f[R] links as they are.
+\f[V]javascript\f[R] obfuscates them using JavaScript.
+\f[V]references\f[R] obfuscates them by printing their letters as
decimal or hexadecimal character references.
-The default is \f[C]none\f[R].
+The default is \f[V]none\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--id-prefix=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]STRING\f[R]
+\f[V]--id-prefix=\f[R]\f[I]STRING\f[R]
Specify a prefix to be added to all identifiers and internal links in
HTML and DocBook output, and to footnote numbers in Markdown and Haddock
output.
This is useful for preventing duplicate identifiers when generating
fragments to be included in other pages.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-T\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]STRING\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--title-prefix=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]STRING\f[R]
+\f[V]-T\f[R] \f[I]STRING\f[R], \f[V]--title-prefix=\f[R]\f[I]STRING\f[R]
Specify \f[I]STRING\f[R] as a prefix at the beginning of the title that
appears in the HTML header (but not in the title as it appears at the
beginning of the HTML body).
-Implies \f[C]--standalone\f[R].
+Implies \f[V]--standalone\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-c\f[B]\f[R] \f[I]URL\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--css=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]
+\f[V]-c\f[R] \f[I]URL\f[R], \f[V]--css=\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]
Link to a CSS style sheet.
This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple files.
They will be included in the order specified.
.RS
.PP
A stylesheet is required for generating EPUB.
-If none is provided using this option (or the \f[C]css\f[R] or
-\f[C]stylesheet\f[R] metadata fields), pandoc will look for a file
-\f[C]epub.css\f[R] in the user data directory (see
-\f[C]--data-dir\f[R]).
+If none is provided using this option (or the \f[V]css\f[R] or
+\f[V]stylesheet\f[R] metadata fields), pandoc will look for a file
+\f[V]epub.css\f[R] in the user data directory (see
+\f[V]--data-dir\f[R]).
If it is not found there, sensible defaults will be used.
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--reference-doc=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--reference-doc=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Use the specified file as a style reference in producing a docx or ODT
file.
.RS
@@ -1141,15 +1155,15 @@ The contents of the reference docx are ignored, but its stylesheets and
document properties (including margins, page size, header, and footer)
are used in the new docx.
If no reference docx is specified on the command line, pandoc will look
-for a file \f[C]reference.docx\f[R] in the user data directory (see
-\f[C]--data-dir\f[R]).
+for a file \f[V]reference.docx\f[R] in the user data directory (see
+\f[V]--data-dir\f[R]).
If this is not found either, sensible defaults will be used.
.RS
.PP
-To produce a custom \f[C]reference.docx\f[R], first get a copy of the
-default \f[C]reference.docx\f[R]:
-\f[C]pandoc -o custom-reference.docx --print-default-data-file reference.docx\f[R].
-Then open \f[C]custom-reference.docx\f[R] in Word, modify the styles as
+To produce a custom \f[V]reference.docx\f[R], first get a copy of the
+default \f[V]reference.docx\f[R]:
+\f[V]pandoc -o custom-reference.docx --print-default-data-file reference.docx\f[R].
+Then open \f[V]custom-reference.docx\f[R] in Word, modify the styles as
you wish, and save the file.
For best results, do not make changes to this file other than modifying
the styles used by pandoc:
@@ -1239,21 +1253,21 @@ ODT produced using pandoc.
The contents of the reference ODT are ignored, but its stylesheets are
used in the new ODT.
If no reference ODT is specified on the command line, pandoc will look
-for a file \f[C]reference.odt\f[R] in the user data directory (see
-\f[C]--data-dir\f[R]).
+for a file \f[V]reference.odt\f[R] in the user data directory (see
+\f[V]--data-dir\f[R]).
If this is not found either, sensible defaults will be used.
.RS
.PP
-To produce a custom \f[C]reference.odt\f[R], first get a copy of the
-default \f[C]reference.odt\f[R]:
-\f[C]pandoc -o custom-reference.odt --print-default-data-file reference.odt\f[R].
-Then open \f[C]custom-reference.odt\f[R] in LibreOffice, modify the
+To produce a custom \f[V]reference.odt\f[R], first get a copy of the
+default \f[V]reference.odt\f[R]:
+\f[V]pandoc -o custom-reference.odt --print-default-data-file reference.odt\f[R].
+Then open \f[V]custom-reference.odt\f[R] in LibreOffice, modify the
styles as you wish, and save the file.
.RE
.TP
PowerPoint
Templates included with Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 (either with
-\f[C].pptx\f[R] or \f[C].potx\f[R] extension) are known to work, as are
+\f[V].pptx\f[R] or \f[V].potx\f[R] extension) are known to work, as are
most templates derived from these.
.RS
.PP
@@ -1282,25 +1296,25 @@ instead.
.PP
All templates included with a recent version of MS PowerPoint will fit
these criteria.
-(You can click on \f[C]Layout\f[R] under the \f[C]Home\f[R] menu to
+(You can click on \f[V]Layout\f[R] under the \f[V]Home\f[R] menu to
check.)
.PP
-You can also modify the default \f[C]reference.pptx\f[R]: first run
-\f[C]pandoc -o custom-reference.pptx --print-default-data-file reference.pptx\f[R],
-and then modify \f[C]custom-reference.pptx\f[R] in MS PowerPoint (pandoc
+You can also modify the default \f[V]reference.pptx\f[R]: first run
+\f[V]pandoc -o custom-reference.pptx --print-default-data-file reference.pptx\f[R],
+and then modify \f[V]custom-reference.pptx\f[R] in MS PowerPoint (pandoc
will use the layouts with the names listed above).
.RE
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--epub-cover-image=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--epub-cover-image=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Use the specified image as the EPUB cover.
It is recommended that the image be less than 1000px in width and
height.
Note that in a Markdown source document you can also specify
-\f[C]cover-image\f[R] in a YAML metadata block (see EPUB Metadata,
+\f[V]cover-image\f[R] in a YAML metadata block (see EPUB Metadata,
below).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--epub-metadata=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--epub-metadata=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Look in the specified XML file for metadata for the EPUB.
The file should contain a series of Dublin Core elements.
For example:
@@ -1314,11 +1328,11 @@ For example:
.fi
.PP
By default, pandoc will include the following metadata elements:
-\f[C]<dc:title>\f[R] (from the document title), \f[C]<dc:creator>\f[R]
-(from the document authors), \f[C]<dc:date>\f[R] (from the document
-date, which should be in ISO 8601 format), \f[C]<dc:language>\f[R] (from
-the \f[C]lang\f[R] variable, or, if is not set, the locale), and
-\f[C]<dc:identifier id=\[dq]BookId\[dq]>\f[R] (a randomly generated
+\f[V]<dc:title>\f[R] (from the document title), \f[V]<dc:creator>\f[R]
+(from the document authors), \f[V]<dc:date>\f[R] (from the document
+date, which should be in ISO 8601 format), \f[V]<dc:language>\f[R] (from
+the \f[V]lang\f[R] variable, or, if is not set, the locale), and
+\f[V]<dc:identifier id=\[dq]BookId\[dq]>\f[R] (a randomly generated
UUID).
Any of these may be overridden by elements in the metadata file.
.PP
@@ -1327,15 +1341,15 @@ document can be used instead.
See below under EPUB Metadata.
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--epub-embed-font=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+\f[V]--epub-embed-font=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
Embed the specified font in the EPUB.
This option can be repeated to embed multiple fonts.
-Wildcards can also be used: for example, \f[C]DejaVuSans-*.ttf\f[R].
+Wildcards can also be used: for example, \f[V]DejaVuSans-*.ttf\f[R].
However, if you use wildcards on the command line, be sure to escape
them or put the whole filename in single quotes, to prevent them from
being interpreted by the shell.
To use the embedded fonts, you will need to add declarations like the
-following to your CSS (see \f[C]--css\f[R]):
+following to your CSS (see \f[V]--css\f[R]):
.RS
.IP
.nf
@@ -1369,7 +1383,7 @@ body { font-family: \[dq]DejaVuSans\[dq]; }
.fi
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--epub-chapter-level=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[V]--epub-chapter-level=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
Specify the heading level at which to split the EPUB into separate
\[lq]chapter\[rq] files.
The default is to split into chapters at level-1 headings.
@@ -1379,168 +1393,168 @@ Some readers may be slow if the chapter files are too large, so for
large documents with few level-1 headings, one might want to use a
chapter level of 2 or 3.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--epub-subdirectory=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]DIRNAME\f[R]
+\f[V]--epub-subdirectory=\f[R]\f[I]DIRNAME\f[R]
Specify the subdirectory in the OCF container that is to hold the
EPUB-specific contents.
-The default is \f[C]EPUB\f[R].
+The default is \f[V]EPUB\f[R].
To put the EPUB contents in the top level, use an empty string.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--ipynb-output=all|none|best\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--ipynb-output=all|none|best\f[R]
Determines how ipynb output cells are treated.
-\f[C]all\f[R] means that all of the data formats included in the
+\f[V]all\f[R] means that all of the data formats included in the
original are preserved.
-\f[C]none\f[R] means that the contents of data cells are omitted.
-\f[C]best\f[R] causes pandoc to try to pick the richest data block in
+\f[V]none\f[R] means that the contents of data cells are omitted.
+\f[V]best\f[R] causes pandoc to try to pick the richest data block in
each output cell that is compatible with the output format.
-The default is \f[C]best\f[R].
+The default is \f[V]best\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--pdf-engine=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]PROGRAM\f[R]
+\f[V]--pdf-engine=\f[R]\f[I]PROGRAM\f[R]
Use the specified engine when producing PDF output.
-Valid values are \f[C]pdflatex\f[R], \f[C]lualatex\f[R],
-\f[C]xelatex\f[R], \f[C]latexmk\f[R], \f[C]tectonic\f[R],
-\f[C]wkhtmltopdf\f[R], \f[C]weasyprint\f[R], \f[C]pagedjs-cli\f[R],
-\f[C]prince\f[R], \f[C]context\f[R], and \f[C]pdfroff\f[R].
+Valid values are \f[V]pdflatex\f[R], \f[V]lualatex\f[R],
+\f[V]xelatex\f[R], \f[V]latexmk\f[R], \f[V]tectonic\f[R],
+\f[V]wkhtmltopdf\f[R], \f[V]weasyprint\f[R], \f[V]pagedjs-cli\f[R],
+\f[V]prince\f[R], \f[V]context\f[R], and \f[V]pdfroff\f[R].
If the engine is not in your PATH, the full path of the engine may be
specified here.
If this option is not specified, pandoc uses the following defaults
-depending on the output format specified using \f[C]-t/--to\f[R]:
+depending on the output format specified using \f[V]-t/--to\f[R]:
.RS
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]-t latex\f[R] or none: \f[C]pdflatex\f[R] (other options:
-\f[C]xelatex\f[R], \f[C]lualatex\f[R], \f[C]tectonic\f[R],
-\f[C]latexmk\f[R])
+\f[V]-t latex\f[R] or none: \f[V]pdflatex\f[R] (other options:
+\f[V]xelatex\f[R], \f[V]lualatex\f[R], \f[V]tectonic\f[R],
+\f[V]latexmk\f[R])
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]-t context\f[R]: \f[C]context\f[R]
+\f[V]-t context\f[R]: \f[V]context\f[R]
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]-t html\f[R]: \f[C]wkhtmltopdf\f[R] (other options:
-\f[C]prince\f[R], \f[C]weasyprint\f[R], \f[C]pagedjs-cli\f[R]; see
+\f[V]-t html\f[R]: \f[V]wkhtmltopdf\f[R] (other options:
+\f[V]prince\f[R], \f[V]weasyprint\f[R], \f[V]pagedjs-cli\f[R]; see
print-css.rocks for a good introduction to PDF generation from
HTML/CSS.)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]-t ms\f[R]: \f[C]pdfroff\f[R]
+\f[V]-t ms\f[R]: \f[V]pdfroff\f[R]
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--pdf-engine-opt=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]STRING\f[R]
+\f[V]--pdf-engine-opt=\f[R]\f[I]STRING\f[R]
Use the given string as a command-line argument to the
-\f[C]pdf-engine\f[R].
-For example, to use a persistent directory \f[C]foo\f[R] for
-\f[C]latexmk\f[R]\[cq]s auxiliary files, use
-\f[C]--pdf-engine-opt=-outdir=foo\f[R].
+\f[V]pdf-engine\f[R].
+For example, to use a persistent directory \f[V]foo\f[R] for
+\f[V]latexmk\f[R]\[cq]s auxiliary files, use
+\f[V]--pdf-engine-opt=-outdir=foo\f[R].
Note that no check for duplicate options is done.
.SS Citation rendering
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]-C\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]--citeproc\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]-C\f[R], \f[V]--citeproc\f[R]
Process the citations in the file, replacing them with rendered
citations and adding a bibliography.
Citation processing will not take place unless bibliographic data is
supplied, either through an external file specified using the
-\f[C]--bibliography\f[R] option or the \f[C]bibliography\f[R] field in
-metadata, or via a \f[C]references\f[R] section in metadata containing a
+\f[V]--bibliography\f[R] option or the \f[V]bibliography\f[R] field in
+metadata, or via a \f[V]references\f[R] section in metadata containing a
list of citations in CSL YAML format with Markdown formatting.
The style is controlled by a CSL stylesheet specified using the
-\f[C]--csl\f[R] option or the \f[C]csl\f[R] field in metadata.
-(If no stylesheet is specified, the \f[C]chicago-author-date\f[R] style
+\f[V]--csl\f[R] option or the \f[V]csl\f[R] field in metadata.
+(If no stylesheet is specified, the \f[V]chicago-author-date\f[R] style
will be used by default.)
The citation processing transformation may be applied before or after
-filters or Lua filters (see \f[C]--filter\f[R], \f[C]--lua-filter\f[R]):
+filters or Lua filters (see \f[V]--filter\f[R], \f[V]--lua-filter\f[R]):
these transformations are applied in the order they appear on the
command line.
For more information, see the section on Citations.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--bibliography=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
-Set the \f[C]bibliography\f[R] field in the document\[cq]s metadata to
+\f[V]--bibliography=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Set the \f[V]bibliography\f[R] field in the document\[cq]s metadata to
\f[I]FILE\f[R], overriding any value set in the metadata.
If you supply this argument multiple times, each \f[I]FILE\f[R] will be
added to bibliography.
If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP.
If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is not found relative to the working directory, it
-will be sought in the resource path (see \f[C]--resource-path\f[R]).
+will be sought in the resource path (see \f[V]--resource-path\f[R]).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--csl=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
-Set the \f[C]csl\f[R] field in the document\[cq]s metadata to
+\f[V]--csl=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Set the \f[V]csl\f[R] field in the document\[cq]s metadata to
\f[I]FILE\f[R], overriding any value set in the metadata.
-(This is equivalent to \f[C]--metadata csl=FILE\f[R].)
+(This is equivalent to \f[V]--metadata csl=FILE\f[R].)
If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP.
If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is not found relative to the working directory, it
-will be sought in the resource path (see \f[C]--resource-path\f[R]) and
-finally in the \f[C]csl\f[R] subdirectory of the pandoc user data
+will be sought in the resource path (see \f[V]--resource-path\f[R]) and
+finally in the \f[V]csl\f[R] subdirectory of the pandoc user data
directory.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--citation-abbreviations=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
-Set the \f[C]citation-abbreviations\f[R] field in the document\[cq]s
+\f[V]--citation-abbreviations=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Set the \f[V]citation-abbreviations\f[R] field in the document\[cq]s
metadata to \f[I]FILE\f[R], overriding any value set in the metadata.
(This is equivalent to
-\f[C]--metadata citation-abbreviations=FILE\f[R].)
+\f[V]--metadata citation-abbreviations=FILE\f[R].)
If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP.
If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is not found relative to the working directory, it
-will be sought in the resource path (see \f[C]--resource-path\f[R]) and
-finally in the \f[C]csl\f[R] subdirectory of the pandoc user data
+will be sought in the resource path (see \f[V]--resource-path\f[R]) and
+finally in the \f[V]csl\f[R] subdirectory of the pandoc user data
directory.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--natbib\f[B]\f[R]
-Use \f[C]natbib\f[R] for citations in LaTeX output.
-This option is not for use with the \f[C]--citeproc\f[R] option or with
+\f[V]--natbib\f[R]
+Use \f[V]natbib\f[R] for citations in LaTeX output.
+This option is not for use with the \f[V]--citeproc\f[R] option or with
PDF output.
It is intended for use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed
-with \f[C]bibtex\f[R].
+with \f[V]bibtex\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--biblatex\f[B]\f[R]
-Use \f[C]biblatex\f[R] for citations in LaTeX output.
-This option is not for use with the \f[C]--citeproc\f[R] option or with
+\f[V]--biblatex\f[R]
+Use \f[V]biblatex\f[R] for citations in LaTeX output.
+This option is not for use with the \f[V]--citeproc\f[R] option or with
PDF output.
It is intended for use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed
-with \f[C]bibtex\f[R] or \f[C]biber\f[R].
+with \f[V]bibtex\f[R] or \f[V]biber\f[R].
.SS Math rendering in HTML
.PP
The default is to render TeX math as far as possible using Unicode
characters.
-Formulas are put inside a \f[C]span\f[R] with
-\f[C]class=\[dq]math\[dq]\f[R], so that they may be styled differently
+Formulas are put inside a \f[V]span\f[R] with
+\f[V]class=\[dq]math\[dq]\f[R], so that they may be styled differently
from the surrounding text if needed.
However, this gives acceptable results only for basic math, usually you
-will want to use \f[C]--mathjax\f[R] or another of the following
+will want to use \f[V]--mathjax\f[R] or another of the following
options.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--mathjax\f[B]\f[R][\f[B]\f[CB]=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]]
+\f[V]--mathjax\f[R][\f[V]=\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]]
Use MathJax to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
-TeX math will be put between \f[C]\[rs](...\[rs])\f[R] (for inline math)
-or \f[C]\[rs][...\[rs]]\f[R] (for display math) and wrapped in
-\f[C]<span>\f[R] tags with class \f[C]math\f[R].
+TeX math will be put between \f[V]\[rs](...\[rs])\f[R] (for inline math)
+or \f[V]\[rs][...\[rs]]\f[R] (for display math) and wrapped in
+\f[V]<span>\f[R] tags with class \f[V]math\f[R].
Then the MathJax JavaScript will render it.
-The \f[I]URL\f[R] should point to the \f[C]MathJax.js\f[R] load script.
+The \f[I]URL\f[R] should point to the \f[V]MathJax.js\f[R] load script.
If a \f[I]URL\f[R] is not provided, a link to the Cloudflare CDN will be
inserted.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--mathml\f[B]\f[R]
-Convert TeX math to MathML (in \f[C]epub3\f[R], \f[C]docbook4\f[R],
-\f[C]docbook5\f[R], \f[C]jats\f[R], \f[C]html4\f[R] and
-\f[C]html5\f[R]).
-This is the default in \f[C]odt\f[R] output.
+\f[V]--mathml\f[R]
+Convert TeX math to MathML (in \f[V]epub3\f[R], \f[V]docbook4\f[R],
+\f[V]docbook5\f[R], \f[V]jats\f[R], \f[V]html4\f[R] and
+\f[V]html5\f[R]).
+This is the default in \f[V]odt\f[R] output.
Note that currently only Firefox and Safari (and select e-book readers)
natively support MathML.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--webtex\f[B]\f[R][\f[B]\f[CB]=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]]
-Convert TeX formulas to \f[C]<img>\f[R] tags that link to an external
+\f[V]--webtex\f[R][\f[V]=\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]]
+Convert TeX formulas to \f[V]<img>\f[R] tags that link to an external
script that converts formulas to images.
The formula will be URL-encoded and concatenated with the URL provided.
For SVG images you can for example use
-\f[C]--webtex https://latex.codecogs.com/svg.latex?\f[R].
+\f[V]--webtex https://latex.codecogs.com/svg.latex?\f[R].
If no URL is specified, the CodeCogs URL generating PNGs will be used
-(\f[C]https://latex.codecogs.com/png.latex?\f[R]).
-Note: the \f[C]--webtex\f[R] option will affect Markdown output as well
+(\f[V]https://latex.codecogs.com/png.latex?\f[R]).
+Note: the \f[V]--webtex\f[R] option will affect Markdown output as well
as HTML, which is useful if you\[cq]re targeting a version of Markdown
without native math support.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--katex\f[B]\f[R][\f[B]\f[CB]=\f[B]\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]]
+\f[V]--katex\f[R][\f[V]=\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]]
Use KaTeX to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
The \f[I]URL\f[R] is the base URL for the KaTeX library.
-That directory should contain a \f[C]katex.min.js\f[R] and a
-\f[C]katex.min.css\f[R] file.
+That directory should contain a \f[V]katex.min.js\f[R] and a
+\f[V]katex.min.css\f[R] file.
If a \f[I]URL\f[R] is not provided, a link to the KaTeX CDN will be
inserted.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--gladtex\f[B]\f[R]
-Enclose TeX math in \f[C]<eq>\f[R] tags in HTML output.
+\f[V]--gladtex\f[R]
+Enclose TeX math in \f[V]<eq>\f[R] tags in HTML output.
The resulting HTML can then be processed by GladTeX to produce SVG
images of the typeset formulas and an HTML file with these images
embedded.
@@ -1556,20 +1570,20 @@ gladtex -d image_dir myfile.htex
.RE
.SS Options for wrapper scripts
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--dump-args\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--dump-args\f[R]
Print information about command-line arguments to \f[I]stdout\f[R], then
exit.
This option is intended primarily for use in wrapper scripts.
The first line of output contains the name of the output file specified
-with the \f[C]-o\f[R] option, or \f[C]-\f[R] (for \f[I]stdout\f[R]) if
+with the \f[V]-o\f[R] option, or \f[V]-\f[R] (for \f[I]stdout\f[R]) if
no output file was specified.
The remaining lines contain the command-line arguments, one per line, in
the order they appear.
These do not include regular pandoc options and their arguments, but do
-include any options appearing after a \f[C]--\f[R] separator at the end
+include any options appearing after a \f[V]--\f[R] separator at the end
of the line.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]--ignore-args\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]--ignore-args\f[R]
Ignore command-line arguments (for use in wrapper scripts).
Regular pandoc options are not ignored.
Thus, for example,
@@ -1756,7 +1770,7 @@ T}
.TE
.SH DEFAULTS FILES
.PP
-The \f[C]--defaults\f[R] option may be used to specify a package of
+The \f[V]--defaults\f[R] option may be used to specify a package of
options, in the form of a YAML file.
.PP
Fields that are omitted will just have their regular default values.
@@ -1777,12 +1791,12 @@ csl: ${HOME}/mycsldir/special.csl
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-\f[C]${USERDATA}\f[R] may also be used; this will always resolve to the
+\f[V]${USERDATA}\f[R] may also be used; this will always resolve to the
user data directory that is current when the defaults file is parsed,
regardless of the setting of the environment variable
-\f[C]USERDATA\f[R].
+\f[V]USERDATA\f[R].
.PP
-\f[C]${.}\f[R] will resolve to the directory containing the defaults
+\f[V]${.}\f[R] will resolve to the directory containing the defaults
file itself.
This allows you to refer to resources contained in that directory:
.IP
@@ -1800,21 +1814,21 @@ resource-path:
This environment variable interpolation syntax \f[I]only\f[R] works in
fields that expect file paths.
.PP
-Defaults files can be placed in the \f[C]defaults\f[R] subdirectory of
+Defaults files can be placed in the \f[V]defaults\f[R] subdirectory of
the user data directory and used from any directory.
For example, one could create a file specifying defaults for writing
-letters, save it as \f[C]letter.yaml\f[R] in the \f[C]defaults\f[R]
+letters, save it as \f[V]letter.yaml\f[R] in the \f[V]defaults\f[R]
subdirectory of the user data directory, and then invoke these defaults
-from any directory using \f[C]pandoc --defaults letter\f[R] or
-\f[C]pandoc -dletter\f[R].
+from any directory using \f[V]pandoc --defaults letter\f[R] or
+\f[V]pandoc -dletter\f[R].
.PP
When multiple defaults are used, their contents will be combined.
.PP
Note that, where command-line arguments may be repeated
-(\f[C]--metadata-file\f[R], \f[C]--css\f[R],
-\f[C]--include-in-header\f[R], \f[C]--include-before-body\f[R],
-\f[C]--include-after-body\f[R], \f[C]--variable\f[R],
-\f[C]--metadata\f[R], \f[C]--syntax-definition\f[R]), the values
+(\f[V]--metadata-file\f[R], \f[V]--css\f[R],
+\f[V]--include-in-header\f[R], \f[V]--include-before-body\f[R],
+\f[V]--include-after-body\f[R], \f[V]--variable\f[R],
+\f[V]--metadata\f[R], \f[V]--syntax-definition\f[R]), the values
specified on the command line will combine with values specified in the
defaults file, rather than replacing them.
.PP
@@ -1831,21 +1845,26 @@ defaults file
T}
_
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
foo.md
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
input-file: foo.md
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -1853,7 +1872,9 @@ foo.md bar.md
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -1862,8 +1883,12 @@ input-files:
- bar.md
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
.TE
+.PP
+The value of \f[V]input-files\f[R] may be left empty to indicate input
+from stdin, and it can be an empty sequence \f[V][]\f[R] for no input.
.SS General options
.PP
.TS
@@ -1876,13 +1901,16 @@ defaults file
T}
_
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--from markdown+emoji
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -1895,15 +1923,19 @@ from: markdown+emoji
reader: markdown+emoji
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--to markdown+hard_line_breaks
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -1916,113 +1948,168 @@ to: markdown+hard_line_breaks
writer: markdown+hard_line_breaks
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--output foo.pdf
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
output-file: foo.pdf
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--output -
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
output-file:
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--data-dir dir
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
data-dir: dir
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.nf
+\f[C]
+--defaults file
+\f[R]
+.fi
+.RE
+T}@T{
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.nf
+\f[C]
+defaults:
+- file
+\f[R]
+.fi
+.RE
+T}
+T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--verbose
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
verbosity: INFO
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--quiet
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
verbosity: ERROR
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--fail-if-warnings
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
fail-if-warnings: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--log=FILE
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
log-file: FILE
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
.TE
+.PP
+Options specified in a defaults file itself always have priority over
+those in another file included with a \f[V]defaults:\f[R] entry.
+.PP
+\f[V]verbosity\f[R] can have the values \f[V]ERROR\f[R],
+\f[V]WARNING\f[R], or \f[V]INFO\f[R].
.SS Reader options
.PP
.TS
@@ -2035,28 +2122,35 @@ defaults file
T}
_
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--shift-heading-level-by -1
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
shift-heading-level-by: -1
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--indented-code-classes python
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2064,38 +2158,48 @@ indented-code-classes:
- python
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--default-image-extension \[dq].jpg\[dq]
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
default-image-extension: \[aq].jpg\[aq]
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--file-scope
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
file-scope: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2105,7 +2209,9 @@ T{
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2116,8 +2222,10 @@ filters:
path: special.lua
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2125,7 +2233,9 @@ T{
--metadata key2
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2134,15 +2244,19 @@ metadata:
key2: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--metadata-file meta.yaml
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2150,83 +2264,120 @@ metadata-files:
- meta.yaml
\f[R]
.fi
+.IP
+.nf
+\f[C]
+metadata-file: meta.yaml
+\f[R]
+.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--preserve-tabs
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
preserve-tabs: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--tab-stop 8
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
tab-stop: 8
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--track-changes accept
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
track-changes: accept
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--extract-media dir
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
extract-media: dir
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--abbreviations abbrevs.txt
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
abbreviations: abbrevs.txt
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
.TE
+.PP
+Metadata values specified in a defaults file are parsed as literal
+string text, not Markdown.
+.PP
+Filters will be assumed to be Lua filters if they have the
+\f[V].lua\f[R] extension, and JSON filters otherwise.
+But the filter type can also be specified explicitly, as shown.
+Filters are run in the order specified.
+To include the built-in citeproc filter, use either \f[V]citeproc\f[R]
+or \f[V]{type: citeproc}\f[R].
.SS General writer options
.PP
.TS
@@ -2239,36 +2390,45 @@ defaults file
T}
_
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--standalone
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
standalone: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--template letter
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
template: letter
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2276,7 +2436,9 @@ T{
--variable key2
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2285,150 +2447,209 @@ variables:
key2: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--eol nl
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
eol: nl
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--dpi 300
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
dpi: 300
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--wrap 60
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
wrap: 60
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--columns 72
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
columns: 72
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.nf
+\f[C]
+--table-of-contents
+\f[R]
+.fi
+.RE
+T}@T{
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.nf
+\f[C]
+table-of-contents: true
+\f[R]
+.fi
+.RE
+T}
+T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--toc
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
toc: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--toc-depth 3
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
toc-depth: 3
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--strip-comments
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
strip-comments: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--no-highlight
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
highlight-style: null
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--highlight-style kate
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
highlight-style: kate
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--syntax-definition mylang.xml
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2436,15 +2657,25 @@ syntax-definitions:
- mylang.xml
\f[R]
.fi
+.IP
+.nf
+\f[C]
+syntax-definition: mylang.xml
+\f[R]
+.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--include-in-header inc.tex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2452,15 +2683,19 @@ include-in-header:
- inc.tex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--include-before-body inc.tex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2468,15 +2703,19 @@ include-before-body:
- inc.tex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--include-after-body inc.tex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2484,37 +2723,46 @@ include-after-body:
- inc.tex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--resource-path .:foo
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
resource-path: [\[aq].\[aq],\[aq]foo\[aq]]
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--request-header foo:bar
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
request-headers:
- - [\[aq]foo\[aq], \[aq]bar\[aq]]
+ - [\[dq]User-Agent\[dq], \[dq]Mozilla/5.0\[dq]]
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
.TE
.SS Options affecting specific writers
@@ -2529,246 +2777,311 @@ defaults file
T}
_
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--self-contained
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
self-contained: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--html-q-tags
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
html-q-tags: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--ascii
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
ascii: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--reference-links
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
reference-links: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--reference-location block
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
reference-location: block
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--markdown-headings atx
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
markdown-headings: atx
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--top-level-division chapter
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
top-level-division: chapter
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--number-sections
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
number-sections: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--number-offset=1,4
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
number-offset: \[rs][1,4\[rs]]
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--listings
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
listings: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--incremental
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
incremental: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--slide-level 2
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
slide-level: 2
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--section-divs
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
section-divs: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--email-obfuscation references
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
email-obfuscation: references
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--id-prefix ch1
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
identifier-prefix: ch1
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--title-prefix MySite
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
title-prefix: MySite
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2776,7 +3089,9 @@ T{
--css styles/special.css
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2785,53 +3100,67 @@ css:
- styles/special.css
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--reference-doc my.docx
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
reference-doc: my.docx
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--epub-cover-image cover.jpg
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
epub-cover-image: cover.jpg
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--epub-metadata meta.xml
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
epub-metadata: meta.xml
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2839,7 +3168,9 @@ T{
--epub-embed-font headline.otf
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2848,82 +3179,109 @@ epub-fonts:
- headline.otf
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--epub-chapter-level 2
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
epub-chapter-level: 2
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--epub-subdirectory=\[dq]\[dq]
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
epub-subdirectory: \[aq]\[aq]
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--ipynb-output best
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
ipynb-output: best
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--pdf-engine xelatex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
pdf-engine: xelatex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--pdf-engine-opt=--shell-escape
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
pdf-engine-opts:
- - \[aq]--shell-escape\[aq]
+ - \[aq]-shell-escape\[aq]
\f[R]
.fi
+.IP
+.nf
+\f[C]
+pdf-engine-opt: \[aq]-shell-escape\[aq]
+\f[R]
+.fi
+.RE
T}
.TE
.SS Citation rendering
@@ -2938,28 +3296,35 @@ defaults file
T}
_
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--citeproc
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
citeproc: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--bibliography logic.bib
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2967,15 +3332,19 @@ metadata:
bibliography: logic.bib
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--csl ieee.csl
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2983,15 +3352,19 @@ metadata:
csl: ieee.csl
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--citation-abbreviations ab.json
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -2999,42 +3372,58 @@ metadata:
citation-abbreviations: ab.json
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--natbib
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
cite-method: natbib
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--biblatex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
cite-method: biblatex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
.TE
-.SS Math rendering in HTML
.PP
-If the option accepts a URL argument, an \f[C]url:\f[R] field can be
-added to \f[C]html-math-method:\f[R].
+\f[V]cite-method\f[R] can be \f[V]citeproc\f[R], \f[V]natbib\f[R], or
+\f[V]biblatex\f[R].
+This only affects LaTeX output.
+If you want to use citeproc to format citations, you should also set
+`citeproc: true'.
+.PP
+If you need control over when the citeproc processing is done relative
+to other filters, you should instead use \f[V]citeproc\f[R] in the list
+of \f[V]filters\f[R] (see above).
+.SS Math rendering in HTML
.PP
.TS
tab(@);
@@ -3046,13 +3435,16 @@ defaults file
T}
_
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--mathjax
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -3060,15 +3452,19 @@ html-math-method:
method: mathjax
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--mathml
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -3076,15 +3472,19 @@ html-math-method:
method: mathml
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--webtex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -3092,15 +3492,19 @@ html-math-method:
method: webtex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--katex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -3108,15 +3512,19 @@ html-math-method:
method: katex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--gladtex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -3124,8 +3532,15 @@ html-math-method:
method: gladtex
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
.TE
+.PP
+In addition to the values listed above, \f[V]method\f[R] can have the
+value \f[V]plain\f[R].
+.PP
+If the command line option accepts a URL argument, an \f[V]url:\f[R]
+field can be added to \f[V]html-math-method:\f[R].
.SS Options for wrapper scripts
.PP
.TS
@@ -3138,54 +3553,66 @@ defaults file
T}
_
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--trace
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
trace: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--dump-args
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
dump-args: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
--ignore-args
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}@T{
+.RS -14n
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
ignore-args: true
\f[R]
.fi
+.RE
T}
.TE
.SH TEMPLATES
.PP
-When the \f[C]-s/--standalone\f[R] option is used, pandoc uses a
+When the \f[V]-s/--standalone\f[R] option is used, pandoc uses a
template to add header and footer material that is needed for a
self-standing document.
To see the default template that is used, just type
@@ -3197,33 +3624,33 @@ pandoc -D *FORMAT*
.fi
.PP
where \f[I]FORMAT\f[R] is the name of the output format.
-A custom template can be specified using the \f[C]--template\f[R]
+A custom template can be specified using the \f[V]--template\f[R]
option.
You can also override the system default templates for a given output
format \f[I]FORMAT\f[R] by putting a file
-\f[C]templates/default.*FORMAT*\f[R] in the user data directory (see
-\f[C]--data-dir\f[R], above).
+\f[V]templates/default.*FORMAT*\f[R] in the user data directory (see
+\f[V]--data-dir\f[R], above).
\f[I]Exceptions:\f[R]
.IP \[bu] 2
-For \f[C]odt\f[R] output, customize the \f[C]default.opendocument\f[R]
+For \f[V]odt\f[R] output, customize the \f[V]default.opendocument\f[R]
template.
.IP \[bu] 2
-For \f[C]pdf\f[R] output, customize the \f[C]default.latex\f[R] template
-(or the \f[C]default.context\f[R] template, if you use
-\f[C]-t context\f[R], or the \f[C]default.ms\f[R] template, if you use
-\f[C]-t ms\f[R], or the \f[C]default.html\f[R] template, if you use
-\f[C]-t html\f[R]).
+For \f[V]pdf\f[R] output, customize the \f[V]default.latex\f[R] template
+(or the \f[V]default.context\f[R] template, if you use
+\f[V]-t context\f[R], or the \f[V]default.ms\f[R] template, if you use
+\f[V]-t ms\f[R], or the \f[V]default.html\f[R] template, if you use
+\f[V]-t html\f[R]).
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]docx\f[R] and \f[C]pptx\f[R] have no template (however, you can use
-\f[C]--reference-doc\f[R] to customize the output).
+\f[V]docx\f[R] and \f[V]pptx\f[R] have no template (however, you can use
+\f[V]--reference-doc\f[R] to customize the output).
.PP
Templates contain \f[I]variables\f[R], which allow for the inclusion of
arbitrary information at any point in the file.
-They may be set at the command line using the \f[C]-V/--variable\f[R]
+They may be set at the command line using the \f[V]-V/--variable\f[R]
option.
If a variable is not set, pandoc will look for the key in the
document\[cq]s metadata, which can be set using either YAML metadata
-blocks or with the \f[C]-M/--metadata\f[R] option.
+blocks or with the \f[V]-M/--metadata\f[R] option.
In addition, some variables are given default values by pandoc.
See Variables below for a list of variables used in pandoc\[cq]s default
templates.
@@ -3237,12 +3664,12 @@ merge in changes after each pandoc release.
.SS Template syntax
.SS Comments
.PP
-Anything between the sequence \f[C]$--\f[R] and the end of the line will
+Anything between the sequence \f[V]$--\f[R] and the end of the line will
be treated as a comment and omitted from the output.
.SS Delimiters
.PP
To mark variables and control structures in the template, either
-\f[C]$\f[R]\&...\f[C]$\f[R] or \f[C]${\f[R]\&...\f[C]}\f[R] may be used
+\f[V]$\f[R]\&...\f[V]$\f[R] or \f[V]${\f[R]\&...\f[V]}\f[R] may be used
as delimiters.
The styles may also be mixed in the same template, but the opening and
closing delimiter must match in each case.
@@ -3251,15 +3678,15 @@ which will be ignored.
The closing delimiter may be followed by one or more spaces or tabs,
which will be ignored.
.PP
-To include a literal \f[C]$\f[R] in the document, use \f[C]$$\f[R].
+To include a literal \f[V]$\f[R] in the document, use \f[V]$$\f[R].
.SS Interpolated variables
.PP
A slot for an interpolated variable is a variable name surrounded by
matched delimiters.
Variable names must begin with a letter and can contain letters,
-numbers, \f[C]_\f[R], \f[C]-\f[R], and \f[C].\f[R].
-The keywords \f[C]it\f[R], \f[C]if\f[R], \f[C]else\f[R],
-\f[C]endif\f[R], \f[C]for\f[R], \f[C]sep\f[R], and \f[C]endfor\f[R] may
+numbers, \f[V]_\f[R], \f[V]-\f[R], and \f[V].\f[R].
+The keywords \f[V]it\f[R], \f[V]if\f[R], \f[V]else\f[R],
+\f[V]endif\f[R], \f[V]for\f[R], \f[V]sep\f[R], and \f[V]endfor\f[R] may
not be used as variable names.
Examples:
.IP
@@ -3278,9 +3705,9 @@ ${ foo }
.PP
Variable names with periods are used to get at structured variable
values.
-So, for example, \f[C]employee.salary\f[R] will return the value of the
-\f[C]salary\f[R] field of the object that is the value of the
-\f[C]employee\f[R] field.
+So, for example, \f[V]employee.salary\f[R] will return the value of the
+\f[V]salary\f[R] field of the object that is the value of the
+\f[V]employee\f[R] field.
.IP \[bu] 2
If the value of the variable is simple value, it will be rendered
verbatim.
@@ -3289,18 +3716,18 @@ program will escape the strings appropriately for the output format.)
.IP \[bu] 2
If the value is a list, the values will be concatenated.
.IP \[bu] 2
-If the value is a map, the string \f[C]true\f[R] will be rendered.
+If the value is a map, the string \f[V]true\f[R] will be rendered.
.IP \[bu] 2
Every other value will be rendered as the empty string.
.SS Conditionals
.PP
-A conditional begins with \f[C]if(variable)\f[R] (enclosed in matched
-delimiters) and ends with \f[C]endif\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+A conditional begins with \f[V]if(variable)\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+delimiters) and ends with \f[V]endif\f[R] (enclosed in matched
delimiters).
-It may optionally contain an \f[C]else\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+It may optionally contain an \f[V]else\f[R] (enclosed in matched
delimiters).
-The \f[C]if\f[R] section is used if \f[C]variable\f[R] has a non-empty
-value, otherwise the \f[C]else\f[R] section is used (if present).
+The \f[V]if\f[R] section is used if \f[V]variable\f[R] has a non-empty
+value, otherwise the \f[V]else\f[R] section is used (if present).
Examples:
.IP
.nf
@@ -3331,7 +3758,7 @@ ${endif}
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The keyword \f[C]elseif\f[R] may be used to simplify complex nested
+The keyword \f[V]elseif\f[R] may be used to simplify complex nested
conditionals:
.IP
.nf
@@ -3347,15 +3774,15 @@ $endif$
.fi
.SS For loops
.PP
-A for loop begins with \f[C]for(variable)\f[R] (enclosed in matched
-delimiters) and ends with \f[C]endfor\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+A for loop begins with \f[V]for(variable)\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+delimiters) and ends with \f[V]endfor\f[R] (enclosed in matched
delimiters.
.IP \[bu] 2
-If \f[C]variable\f[R] is an array, the material inside the loop will be
-evaluated repeatedly, with \f[C]variable\f[R] being set to each value of
+If \f[V]variable\f[R] is an array, the material inside the loop will be
+evaluated repeatedly, with \f[V]variable\f[R] being set to each value of
the array in turn, and concatenated.
.IP \[bu] 2
-If \f[C]variable\f[R] is a map, the material inside will be set to the
+If \f[V]variable\f[R] is a map, the material inside will be set to the
map.
.IP \[bu] 2
If the value of the associated variable is not an array or a map, a
@@ -3382,8 +3809,8 @@ $endfor$
.fi
.PP
You may optionally specify a separator between consecutive values using
-\f[C]sep\f[R] (enclosed in matched delimiters).
-The material between \f[C]sep\f[R] and the \f[C]endfor\f[R] is the
+\f[V]sep\f[R] (enclosed in matched delimiters).
+The material between \f[V]sep\f[R] and the \f[V]endfor\f[R] is the
separator.
.IP
.nf
@@ -3392,8 +3819,8 @@ ${ for(foo) }${ foo }${ sep }, ${ endfor }
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Instead of using \f[C]variable\f[R] inside the loop, the special
-anaphoric keyword \f[C]it\f[R] may be used.
+Instead of using \f[V]variable\f[R] inside the loop, the special
+anaphoric keyword \f[V]it\f[R] may be used.
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -3405,7 +3832,7 @@ ${ endfor }
.SS Partials
.PP
Partials (subtemplates stored in different files) may be included by
-using the name of the partial, followed by \f[C]()\f[R], for example:
+using the name of the partial, followed by \f[V]()\f[R], for example:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -3427,7 +3854,7 @@ ${ styles.html() }
.PP
(If a partial is not found in the directory of the template and the
template path is given as a relative path, it will also be sought in the
-\f[C]templates\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory.)
+\f[V]templates\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory.)
.PP
Partials may optionally be applied to variables using a colon:
.IP
@@ -3439,8 +3866,8 @@ ${ articles:bibentry() }
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-If \f[C]articles\f[R] is an array, this will iterate over its values,
-applying the partial \f[C]bibentry()\f[R] to each one.
+If \f[V]articles\f[R] is an array, this will iterate over its values,
+applying the partial \f[V]bibentry()\f[R] to each one.
So the second example above is equivalent to
.IP
.nf
@@ -3451,10 +3878,10 @@ ${ endfor }
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Note that the anaphoric keyword \f[C]it\f[R] must be used when iterating
+Note that the anaphoric keyword \f[V]it\f[R] must be used when iterating
over partials.
-In the above examples, the \f[C]bibentry\f[R] partial should contain
-\f[C]it.title\f[R] (and so on) instead of \f[C]articles.title\f[R].
+In the above examples, the \f[V]bibentry\f[R] partial should contain
+\f[V]it.title\f[R] (and so on) instead of \f[V]articles.title\f[R].
.PP
Final newlines are omitted from included partials.
.PP
@@ -3471,13 +3898,13 @@ ${articles:bibentry()[; ]$
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The separator in this case is literal and (unlike with \f[C]sep\f[R] in
-an explicit \f[C]for\f[R] loop) cannot contain interpolated variables or
+The separator in this case is literal and (unlike with \f[V]sep\f[R] in
+an explicit \f[V]for\f[R] loop) cannot contain interpolated variables or
other template directives.
.SS Nesting
.PP
To ensure that content is \[lq]nested,\[rq] that is, subsequent lines
-indented, use the \f[C]\[ha]\f[R] directive:
+indented, use the \f[V]\[ha]\f[R] directive:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -3485,7 +3912,7 @@ $item.number$ $\[ha]$$item.description$ ($item.price$)
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-In this example, if \f[C]item.description\f[R] has multiple lines, they
+In this example, if \f[V]item.description\f[R] has multiple lines, they
will all be indented to line up with the first line:
.IP
.nf
@@ -3496,7 +3923,7 @@ will all be indented to line up with the first line:
.fi
.PP
To nest multiple lines to the same level, align them with the
-\f[C]\[ha]\f[R] directive in the template.
+\f[V]\[ha]\f[R] directive in the template.
For example:
.IP
.nf
@@ -3524,8 +3951,8 @@ automatically.
.PP
Normally, spaces in the template itself (as opposed to values of the
interpolated variables) are not breakable, but they can be made
-breakable in part of the template by using the \f[C]\[ti]\f[R] keyword
-(ended with another \f[C]\[ti]\f[R]).
+breakable in part of the template by using the \f[V]\[ti]\f[R] keyword
+(ended with another \f[V]\[ti]\f[R]).
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -3536,7 +3963,7 @@ with a short line length.$\[ti]$
.SS Pipes
.PP
A pipe transforms the value of a variable or partial.
-Pipes are specified using a slash (\f[C]/\f[R]) between the variable
+Pipes are specified using a slash (\f[V]/\f[R]) between the variable
name (or partial) and the pipe name.
Example:
.IP
@@ -3578,67 +4005,67 @@ $endfor$
.PP
Currently the following pipes are predefined:
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]pairs\f[R]: Converts a map or array to an array of maps, each with
-\f[C]key\f[R] and \f[C]value\f[R] fields.
-If the original value was an array, the \f[C]key\f[R] will be the array
+\f[V]pairs\f[R]: Converts a map or array to an array of maps, each with
+\f[V]key\f[R] and \f[V]value\f[R] fields.
+If the original value was an array, the \f[V]key\f[R] will be the array
index, starting with 1.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]uppercase\f[R]: Converts text to uppercase.
+\f[V]uppercase\f[R]: Converts text to uppercase.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]lowercase\f[R]: Converts text to lowercase.
+\f[V]lowercase\f[R]: Converts text to lowercase.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]length\f[R]: Returns the length of the value: number of characters
+\f[V]length\f[R]: Returns the length of the value: number of characters
for a textual value, number of elements for a map or array.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]reverse\f[R]: Reverses a textual value or array, and has no effect
+\f[V]reverse\f[R]: Reverses a textual value or array, and has no effect
on other values.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]first\f[R]: Returns the first value of an array, if applied to a
+\f[V]first\f[R]: Returns the first value of an array, if applied to a
non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]last\f[R]: Returns the last value of an array, if applied to a
+\f[V]last\f[R]: Returns the last value of an array, if applied to a
non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]rest\f[R]: Returns all but the first value of an array, if applied
+\f[V]rest\f[R]: Returns all but the first value of an array, if applied
to a non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]allbutlast\f[R]: Returns all but the last value of an array, if
+\f[V]allbutlast\f[R]: Returns all but the last value of an array, if
applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]chomp\f[R]: Removes trailing newlines (and breakable space).
+\f[V]chomp\f[R]: Removes trailing newlines (and breakable space).
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]nowrap\f[R]: Disables line wrapping on breakable spaces.
+\f[V]nowrap\f[R]: Disables line wrapping on breakable spaces.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]alpha\f[R]: Converts textual values that can be read as an integer
-into lowercase alphabetic characters \f[C]a..z\f[R] (mod 26).
+\f[V]alpha\f[R]: Converts textual values that can be read as an integer
+into lowercase alphabetic characters \f[V]a..z\f[R] (mod 26).
This can be used to get lettered enumeration from array indices.
-To get uppercase letters, chain with \f[C]uppercase\f[R].
+To get uppercase letters, chain with \f[V]uppercase\f[R].
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]roman\f[R]: Converts textual values that can be read as an integer
+\f[V]roman\f[R]: Converts textual values that can be read as an integer
into lowercase roman numerials.
This can be used to get lettered enumeration from array indices.
-To get uppercase roman, chain with \f[C]uppercase\f[R].
+To get uppercase roman, chain with \f[V]uppercase\f[R].
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]left n \[dq]leftborder\[dq] \[dq]rightborder\[dq]\f[R]: Renders a
-textual value in a block of width \f[C]n\f[R], aligned to the left, with
+\f[V]left n \[dq]leftborder\[dq] \[dq]rightborder\[dq]\f[R]: Renders a
+textual value in a block of width \f[V]n\f[R], aligned to the left, with
an optional left and right border.
Has no effect on other values.
This can be used to align material in tables.
Widths are positive integers indicating the number of characters.
-Borders are strings inside double quotes; literal \f[C]\[dq]\f[R] and
-\f[C]\[rs]\f[R] characters must be backslash-escaped.
+Borders are strings inside double quotes; literal \f[V]\[dq]\f[R] and
+\f[V]\[rs]\f[R] characters must be backslash-escaped.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]right n \[dq]leftborder\[dq] \[dq]rightborder\[dq]\f[R]: Renders a
-textual value in a block of width \f[C]n\f[R], aligned to the right, and
+\f[V]right n \[dq]leftborder\[dq] \[dq]rightborder\[dq]\f[R]: Renders a
+textual value in a block of width \f[V]n\f[R], aligned to the right, and
has no effect on other values.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]center n \[dq]leftborder\[dq] \[dq]rightborder\[dq]\f[R]: Renders a
-textual value in a block of width \f[C]n\f[R], aligned to the center,
+\f[V]center n \[dq]leftborder\[dq] \[dq]rightborder\[dq]\f[R]: Renders a
+textual value in a block of width \f[V]n\f[R], aligned to the center,
and has no effect on other values.
.SS Variables
.SS Metadata variables
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]title\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]author\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]date\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]title\f[R], \f[V]author\f[R], \f[V]date\f[R]
allow identification of basic aspects of the document.
Included in PDF metadata through LaTeX and ConTeXt.
These can be set through a pandoc title block, which allows for multiple
@@ -3657,39 +4084,39 @@ author:
.PP
Note that if you just want to set PDF or HTML metadata, without
including a title block in the document itself, you can set the
-\f[C]title-meta\f[R], \f[C]author-meta\f[R], and \f[C]date-meta\f[R]
+\f[V]title-meta\f[R], \f[V]author-meta\f[R], and \f[V]date-meta\f[R]
variables.
-(By default these are set automatically, based on \f[C]title\f[R],
-\f[C]author\f[R], and \f[C]date\f[R].)
-The page title in HTML is set by \f[C]pagetitle\f[R], which is equal to
-\f[C]title\f[R] by default.
+(By default these are set automatically, based on \f[V]title\f[R],
+\f[V]author\f[R], and \f[V]date\f[R].)
+The page title in HTML is set by \f[V]pagetitle\f[R], which is equal to
+\f[V]title\f[R] by default.
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]subtitle\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]subtitle\f[R]
document subtitle, included in HTML, EPUB, LaTeX, ConTeXt, and docx
documents
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]abstract\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]abstract\f[R]
document summary, included in LaTeX, ConTeXt, AsciiDoc, and docx
documents
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]abstract-title\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]abstract-title\f[R]
title of abstract, currently used only in HTML and EPUB.
This will be set automatically to a localized value, depending on
-\f[C]lang\f[R], but can be manually overridden.
+\f[V]lang\f[R], but can be manually overridden.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]keywords\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]keywords\f[R]
list of keywords to be included in HTML, PDF, ODT, pptx, docx and
-AsciiDoc metadata; repeat as for \f[C]author\f[R], above
+AsciiDoc metadata; repeat as for \f[V]author\f[R], above
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]subject\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]subject\f[R]
document subject, included in ODT, PDF, docx, EPUB, and pptx metadata
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]description\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]description\f[R]
document description, included in ODT, docx and pptx metadata.
-Some applications show this as \f[C]Comments\f[R] metadata.
+Some applications show this as \f[V]Comments\f[R] metadata.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]category\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]category\f[R]
document category, included in docx and pptx metadata
.PP
Additionally, any root-level string metadata, not included in ODT, docx
@@ -3713,22 +4140,22 @@ description: |
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-will include \f[C]title\f[R], \f[C]author\f[R] and \f[C]description\f[R]
-as standard document properties and \f[C]subtitle\f[R] as a custom
+will include \f[V]title\f[R], \f[V]author\f[R] and \f[V]description\f[R]
+as standard document properties and \f[V]subtitle\f[R] as a custom
property when converting to docx, ODT or pptx.
.SS Language variables
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]lang\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]lang\f[R]
identifies the main language of the document using IETF language tags
-(following the BCP 47 standard), such as \f[C]en\f[R] or
-\f[C]en-GB\f[R].
+(following the BCP 47 standard), such as \f[V]en\f[R] or
+\f[V]en-GB\f[R].
The Language subtag lookup tool can look up or verify these tags.
This affects most formats, and controls hyphenation in PDF output when
-using LaTeX (through \f[C]babel\f[R] and \f[C]polyglossia\f[R]) or
+using LaTeX (through \f[V]babel\f[R] and \f[V]polyglossia\f[R]) or
ConTeXt.
.RS
.PP
-Use native pandoc Divs and Spans with the \f[C]lang\f[R] attribute to
+Use native pandoc Divs and Spans with the \f[V]lang\f[R] attribute to
switch the language:
.IP
.nf
@@ -3748,65 +4175,65 @@ More text in English. [\[aq]Zitat auf Deutsch.\[aq]]{lang=de}
.fi
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]dir\f[B]\f[R]
-the base script direction, either \f[C]rtl\f[R] (right-to-left) or
-\f[C]ltr\f[R] (left-to-right).
+\f[V]dir\f[R]
+the base script direction, either \f[V]rtl\f[R] (right-to-left) or
+\f[V]ltr\f[R] (left-to-right).
.RS
.PP
-For bidirectional documents, native pandoc \f[C]span\f[R]s and
-\f[C]div\f[R]s with the \f[C]dir\f[R] attribute (value \f[C]rtl\f[R] or
-\f[C]ltr\f[R]) can be used to override the base direction in some output
+For bidirectional documents, native pandoc \f[V]span\f[R]s and
+\f[V]div\f[R]s with the \f[V]dir\f[R] attribute (value \f[V]rtl\f[R] or
+\f[V]ltr\f[R]) can be used to override the base direction in some output
formats.
This may not always be necessary if the final renderer (e.g.\ the
browser, when generating HTML) supports the Unicode Bidirectional
Algorithm.
.PP
-When using LaTeX for bidirectional documents, only the \f[C]xelatex\f[R]
-engine is fully supported (use \f[C]--pdf-engine=xelatex\f[R]).
+When using LaTeX for bidirectional documents, only the \f[V]xelatex\f[R]
+engine is fully supported (use \f[V]--pdf-engine=xelatex\f[R]).
.RE
.SS Variables for HTML
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]document-css\f[B]\f[R]
-Enables inclusion of most of the CSS in the \f[C]styles.html\f[R]
+\f[V]document-css\f[R]
+Enables inclusion of most of the CSS in the \f[V]styles.html\f[R]
partial (have a look with
-\f[C]pandoc --print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html\f[R]).
-Unless you use \f[C]--css\f[R], this variable is set to \f[C]true\f[R]
+\f[V]pandoc --print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html\f[R]).
+Unless you use \f[V]--css\f[R], this variable is set to \f[V]true\f[R]
by default.
-You can disable it with e.g.\ \f[C]pandoc -M document-css=false\f[R].
+You can disable it with e.g.\ \f[V]pandoc -M document-css=false\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]mainfont\f[B]\f[R]
-sets the CSS \f[C]font-family\f[R] property on the \f[C]html\f[R]
+\f[V]mainfont\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[V]font-family\f[R] property on the \f[V]html\f[R]
element.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]fontsize\f[B]\f[R]
-sets the base CSS \f[C]font-size\f[R], which you\[cq]d usually set to
-e.g.\ \f[C]20px\f[R], but it also accepts \f[C]pt\f[R] (12pt = 16px in
+\f[V]fontsize\f[R]
+sets the base CSS \f[V]font-size\f[R], which you\[cq]d usually set to
+e.g.\ \f[V]20px\f[R], but it also accepts \f[V]pt\f[R] (12pt = 16px in
most browsers).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]fontcolor\f[B]\f[R]
-sets the CSS \f[C]color\f[R] property on the \f[C]html\f[R] element.
+\f[V]fontcolor\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[V]color\f[R] property on the \f[V]html\f[R] element.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]linkcolor\f[B]\f[R]
-sets the CSS \f[C]color\f[R] property on all links.
+\f[V]linkcolor\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[V]color\f[R] property on all links.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]monofont\f[B]\f[R]
-sets the CSS \f[C]font-family\f[R] property on \f[C]code\f[R] elements.
+\f[V]monofont\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[V]font-family\f[R] property on \f[V]code\f[R] elements.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]monobackgroundcolor\f[B]\f[R]
-sets the CSS \f[C]background-color\f[R] property on \f[C]code\f[R]
+\f[V]monobackgroundcolor\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[V]background-color\f[R] property on \f[V]code\f[R]
elements and adds extra padding.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]linestretch\f[B]\f[R]
-sets the CSS \f[C]line-height\f[R] property on the \f[C]html\f[R]
+\f[V]linestretch\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[V]line-height\f[R] property on the \f[V]html\f[R]
element, which is preferred to be unitless.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]backgroundcolor\f[B]\f[R]
-sets the CSS \f[C]background-color\f[R] property on the \f[C]html\f[R]
+\f[V]backgroundcolor\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[V]background-color\f[R] property on the \f[V]html\f[R]
element.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]margin-left\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-right\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-top\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-bottom\f[B]\f[R]
-sets the corresponding CSS \f[C]padding\f[R] properties on the
-\f[C]body\f[R] element.
+\f[V]margin-left\f[R], \f[V]margin-right\f[R], \f[V]margin-top\f[R], \f[V]margin-bottom\f[R]
+sets the corresponding CSS \f[V]padding\f[R] properties on the
+\f[V]body\f[R] element.
.PP
To override or extend some CSS for just one document, include for
example:
@@ -3834,92 +4261,92 @@ header-includes: |
.fi
.SS Variables for HTML math
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]classoption\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]classoption\f[R]
when using KaTeX, you can render display math equations flush left using
-YAML metadata or with \f[C]-M classoption=fleqn\f[R].
+YAML metadata or with \f[V]-M classoption=fleqn\f[R].
.SS Variables for HTML slides
.PP
These affect HTML output when [producing slide shows with pandoc].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]institute\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]institute\f[R]
author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple authors
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]revealjs-url\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]revealjs-url\f[R]
base URL for reveal.js documents (defaults to
-\f[C]https://unpkg.com/reveal.js\[at]\[ha]4/\f[R])
+\f[V]https://unpkg.com/reveal.js\[at]\[ha]4/\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]s5-url\f[B]\f[R]
-base URL for S5 documents (defaults to \f[C]s5/default\f[R])
+\f[V]s5-url\f[R]
+base URL for S5 documents (defaults to \f[V]s5/default\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]slidy-url\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]slidy-url\f[R]
base URL for Slidy documents (defaults to
-\f[C]https://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2\f[R])
+\f[V]https://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]slideous-url\f[B]\f[R]
-base URL for Slideous documents (defaults to \f[C]slideous\f[R])
+\f[V]slideous-url\f[R]
+base URL for Slideous documents (defaults to \f[V]slideous\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]title-slide-attributes\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]title-slide-attributes\f[R]
additional attributes for the title slide of reveal.js slide shows.
See [background in reveal.js and beamer] for an example.
.PP
All reveal.js configuration options are available as variables.
To turn off boolean flags that default to true in reveal.js, use
-\f[C]0\f[R].
+\f[V]0\f[R].
.SS Variables for Beamer slides
.PP
These variables change the appearance of PDF slides using
-\f[C]beamer\f[R].
+\f[V]beamer\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]aspectratio\f[B]\f[R]
-slide aspect ratio (\f[C]43\f[R] for 4:3 [default], \f[C]169\f[R] for
-16:9, \f[C]1610\f[R] for 16:10, \f[C]149\f[R] for 14:9, \f[C]141\f[R]
-for 1.41:1, \f[C]54\f[R] for 5:4, \f[C]32\f[R] for 3:2)
+\f[V]aspectratio\f[R]
+slide aspect ratio (\f[V]43\f[R] for 4:3 [default], \f[V]169\f[R] for
+16:9, \f[V]1610\f[R] for 16:10, \f[V]149\f[R] for 14:9, \f[V]141\f[R]
+for 1.41:1, \f[V]54\f[R] for 5:4, \f[V]32\f[R] for 3:2)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]beamerarticle\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]beamerarticle\f[R]
produce an article from Beamer slides
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]beameroption\f[B]\f[R]
-add extra beamer option with \f[C]\[rs]setbeameroption{}\f[R]
+\f[V]beameroption\f[R]
+add extra beamer option with \f[V]\[rs]setbeameroption{}\f[R]
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]institute\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]institute\f[R]
author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple authors
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]logo\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]logo\f[R]
logo image for slides
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]navigation\f[B]\f[R]
-controls navigation symbols (default is \f[C]empty\f[R] for no
-navigation symbols; other valid values are \f[C]frame\f[R],
-\f[C]vertical\f[R], and \f[C]horizontal\f[R])
+\f[V]navigation\f[R]
+controls navigation symbols (default is \f[V]empty\f[R] for no
+navigation symbols; other valid values are \f[V]frame\f[R],
+\f[V]vertical\f[R], and \f[V]horizontal\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]section-titles\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]section-titles\f[R]
enables \[lq]title pages\[rq] for new sections (default is true)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]theme\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]colortheme\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]fonttheme\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]innertheme\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]outertheme\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]theme\f[R], \f[V]colortheme\f[R], \f[V]fonttheme\f[R], \f[V]innertheme\f[R], \f[V]outertheme\f[R]
beamer themes
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]themeoptions\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]themeoptions\f[R]
options for LaTeX beamer themes (a list).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]titlegraphic\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]titlegraphic\f[R]
image for title slide
.SS Variables for PowerPoint
.PP
These variables control the visual aspects of a slide show that are not
easily controlled via templates.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]monofont\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]monofont\f[R]
font to use for code.
.SS Variables for LaTeX
.PP
Pandoc uses these variables when creating a PDF with a LaTeX engine.
.SS Layout
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]block-headings\f[B]\f[R]
-make \f[C]\[rs]paragraph\f[R] and \f[C]\[rs]subparagraph\f[R] (fourth-
+\f[V]block-headings\f[R]
+make \f[V]\[rs]paragraph\f[R] and \f[V]\[rs]subparagraph\f[R] (fourth-
and fifth-level headings, or fifth- and sixth-level with book classes)
free-standing rather than run-in; requires further formatting to
-distinguish from \f[C]\[rs]subsubsection\f[R] (third- or fourth-level
+distinguish from \f[V]\[rs]subsubsection\f[R] (third- or fourth-level
headings).
Instead of using this option, KOMA-Script can adjust headings more
extensively:
@@ -3944,8 +4371,8 @@ header-includes: |
.fi
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]classoption\f[B]\f[R]
-option for document class, e.g.\ \f[C]oneside\f[R]; repeat for multiple
+\f[V]classoption\f[R]
+option for document class, e.g.\ \f[V]oneside\f[R]; repeat for multiple
options:
.RS
.IP
@@ -3960,14 +4387,14 @@ classoption:
.fi
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]documentclass\f[B]\f[R]
-document class: usually one of the standard classes, \f[C]article\f[R],
-\f[C]book\f[R], and \f[C]report\f[R]; the KOMA-Script equivalents,
-\f[C]scrartcl\f[R], \f[C]scrbook\f[R], and \f[C]scrreprt\f[R], which
-default to smaller margins; or \f[C]memoir\f[R]
+\f[V]documentclass\f[R]
+document class: usually one of the standard classes, \f[V]article\f[R],
+\f[V]book\f[R], and \f[V]report\f[R]; the KOMA-Script equivalents,
+\f[V]scrartcl\f[R], \f[V]scrbook\f[R], and \f[V]scrreprt\f[R], which
+default to smaller margins; or \f[V]memoir\f[R]
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]geometry\f[B]\f[R]
-option for \f[C]geometry\f[R] package, e.g.\ \f[C]margin=1in\f[R];
+\f[V]geometry\f[R]
+option for \f[V]geometry\f[R] package, e.g.\ \f[V]margin=1in\f[R];
repeat for multiple options:
.RS
.IP
@@ -3983,8 +4410,8 @@ geometry:
.fi
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]hyperrefoptions\f[B]\f[R]
-option for \f[C]hyperref\f[R] package, e.g.\ \f[C]linktoc=all\f[R];
+\f[V]hyperrefoptions\f[R]
+option for \f[V]hyperref\f[R] package, e.g.\ \f[V]linktoc=all\f[R];
repeat for multiple options:
.RS
.IP
@@ -4000,47 +4427,47 @@ hyperrefoptions:
.fi
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]indent\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]indent\f[R]
if true, pandoc will use document class settings for indentation (the
default LaTeX template otherwise removes indentation and adds space
between paragraphs)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]linestretch\f[B]\f[R]
-adjusts line spacing using the \f[C]setspace\f[R] package,
-e.g.\ \f[C]1.25\f[R], \f[C]1.5\f[R]
+\f[V]linestretch\f[R]
+adjusts line spacing using the \f[V]setspace\f[R] package,
+e.g.\ \f[V]1.25\f[R], \f[V]1.5\f[R]
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]margin-left\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-right\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-top\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-bottom\f[B]\f[R]
-sets margins if \f[C]geometry\f[R] is not used (otherwise
-\f[C]geometry\f[R] overrides these)
+\f[V]margin-left\f[R], \f[V]margin-right\f[R], \f[V]margin-top\f[R], \f[V]margin-bottom\f[R]
+sets margins if \f[V]geometry\f[R] is not used (otherwise
+\f[V]geometry\f[R] overrides these)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]pagestyle\f[B]\f[R]
-control \f[C]\[rs]pagestyle{}\f[R]: the default article class supports
-\f[C]plain\f[R] (default), \f[C]empty\f[R] (no running heads or page
-numbers), and \f[C]headings\f[R] (section titles in running heads)
+\f[V]pagestyle\f[R]
+control \f[V]\[rs]pagestyle{}\f[R]: the default article class supports
+\f[V]plain\f[R] (default), \f[V]empty\f[R] (no running heads or page
+numbers), and \f[V]headings\f[R] (section titles in running heads)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]papersize\f[B]\f[R]
-paper size, e.g.\ \f[C]letter\f[R], \f[C]a4\f[R]
+\f[V]papersize\f[R]
+paper size, e.g.\ \f[V]letter\f[R], \f[V]a4\f[R]
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]secnumdepth\f[B]\f[R]
-numbering depth for sections (with \f[C]--number-sections\f[R] option or
-\f[C]numbersections\f[R] variable)
+\f[V]secnumdepth\f[R]
+numbering depth for sections (with \f[V]--number-sections\f[R] option or
+\f[V]numbersections\f[R] variable)
.SS Fonts
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]fontenc\f[B]\f[R]
-allows font encoding to be specified through \f[C]fontenc\f[R] package
-(with \f[C]pdflatex\f[R]); default is \f[C]T1\f[R] (see LaTeX font
+\f[V]fontenc\f[R]
+allows font encoding to be specified through \f[V]fontenc\f[R] package
+(with \f[V]pdflatex\f[R]); default is \f[V]T1\f[R] (see LaTeX font
encodings guide)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]fontfamily\f[B]\f[R]
-font package for use with \f[C]pdflatex\f[R]: TeX Live includes many
+\f[V]fontfamily\f[R]
+font package for use with \f[V]pdflatex\f[R]: TeX Live includes many
options, documented in the LaTeX Font Catalogue.
The default is Latin Modern.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]fontfamilyoptions\f[B]\f[R]
-options for package used as \f[C]fontfamily\f[R]; repeat for multiple
+\f[V]fontfamilyoptions\f[R]
+options for package used as \f[V]fontfamily\f[R]; repeat for multiple
options.
For example, to use the Libertine font with proportional lowercase
-(old-style) figures through the \f[C]libertinus\f[R] package:
+(old-style) figures through the \f[V]libertinus\f[R] package:
.RS
.IP
.nf
@@ -4055,22 +4482,22 @@ fontfamilyoptions:
.fi
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]fontsize\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]fontsize\f[R]
font size for body text.
The standard classes allow 10pt, 11pt, and 12pt.
-To use another size, set \f[C]documentclass\f[R] to one of the
-KOMA-Script classes, such as \f[C]scrartcl\f[R] or \f[C]scrbook\f[R].
+To use another size, set \f[V]documentclass\f[R] to one of the
+KOMA-Script classes, such as \f[V]scrartcl\f[R] or \f[V]scrbook\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]mainfont\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]sansfont\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]monofont\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]mathfont\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]CJKmainfont\f[B]\f[R]
-font families for use with \f[C]xelatex\f[R] or \f[C]lualatex\f[R]: take
-the name of any system font, using the \f[C]fontspec\f[R] package.
-\f[C]CJKmainfont\f[R] uses the \f[C]xecjk\f[R] package.
+\f[V]mainfont\f[R], \f[V]sansfont\f[R], \f[V]monofont\f[R], \f[V]mathfont\f[R], \f[V]CJKmainfont\f[R]
+font families for use with \f[V]xelatex\f[R] or \f[V]lualatex\f[R]: take
+the name of any system font, using the \f[V]fontspec\f[R] package.
+\f[V]CJKmainfont\f[R] uses the \f[V]xecjk\f[R] package.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]mainfontoptions\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]sansfontoptions\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]monofontoptions\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]mathfontoptions\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]CJKoptions\f[B]\f[R]
-options to use with \f[C]mainfont\f[R], \f[C]sansfont\f[R],
-\f[C]monofont\f[R], \f[C]mathfont\f[R], \f[C]CJKmainfont\f[R] in
-\f[C]xelatex\f[R] and \f[C]lualatex\f[R].
-Allow for any choices available through \f[C]fontspec\f[R]; repeat for
+\f[V]mainfontoptions\f[R], \f[V]sansfontoptions\f[R], \f[V]monofontoptions\f[R], \f[V]mathfontoptions\f[R], \f[V]CJKoptions\f[R]
+options to use with \f[V]mainfont\f[R], \f[V]sansfont\f[R],
+\f[V]monofont\f[R], \f[V]mathfont\f[R], \f[V]CJKmainfont\f[R] in
+\f[V]xelatex\f[R] and \f[V]lualatex\f[R].
+Allow for any choices available through \f[V]fontspec\f[R]; repeat for
multiple options.
For example, to use the TeX Gyre version of Palatino with lowercase
figures:
@@ -4088,235 +4515,235 @@ mainfontoptions:
.fi
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]microtypeoptions\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]microtypeoptions\f[R]
options to pass to the microtype package
.SS Links
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]colorlinks\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]colorlinks\f[R]
add color to link text; automatically enabled if any of
-\f[C]linkcolor\f[R], \f[C]filecolor\f[R], \f[C]citecolor\f[R],
-\f[C]urlcolor\f[R], or \f[C]toccolor\f[R] are set
+\f[V]linkcolor\f[R], \f[V]filecolor\f[R], \f[V]citecolor\f[R],
+\f[V]urlcolor\f[R], or \f[V]toccolor\f[R] are set
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]linkcolor\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]filecolor\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]citecolor\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]urlcolor\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]toccolor\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]linkcolor\f[R], \f[V]filecolor\f[R], \f[V]citecolor\f[R], \f[V]urlcolor\f[R], \f[V]toccolor\f[R]
color for internal links, external links, citation links, linked URLs,
and links in table of contents, respectively: uses options allowed by
-\f[C]xcolor\f[R], including the \f[C]dvipsnames\f[R],
-\f[C]svgnames\f[R], and \f[C]x11names\f[R] lists
+\f[V]xcolor\f[R], including the \f[V]dvipsnames\f[R],
+\f[V]svgnames\f[R], and \f[V]x11names\f[R] lists
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]links-as-notes\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]links-as-notes\f[R]
causes links to be printed as footnotes
.SS Front matter
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]lof\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]lot\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]lof\f[R], \f[V]lot\f[R]
include list of figures, list of tables
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]thanks\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]thanks\f[R]
contents of acknowledgments footnote after document title
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]toc\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]toc\f[R]
include table of contents (can also be set using
-\f[C]--toc/--table-of-contents\f[R])
+\f[V]--toc/--table-of-contents\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]toc-depth\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]toc-depth\f[R]
level of section to include in table of contents
.SS BibLaTeX Bibliographies
.PP
These variables function when using BibLaTeX for citation rendering.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]biblatexoptions\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]biblatexoptions\f[R]
list of options for biblatex
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]biblio-style\f[B]\f[R]
-bibliography style, when used with \f[C]--natbib\f[R] and
-\f[C]--biblatex\f[R].
+\f[V]biblio-style\f[R]
+bibliography style, when used with \f[V]--natbib\f[R] and
+\f[V]--biblatex\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]biblio-title\f[B]\f[R]
-bibliography title, when used with \f[C]--natbib\f[R] and
-\f[C]--biblatex\f[R].
+\f[V]biblio-title\f[R]
+bibliography title, when used with \f[V]--natbib\f[R] and
+\f[V]--biblatex\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]bibliography\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]bibliography\f[R]
bibliography to use for resolving references
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]natbiboptions\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]natbiboptions\f[R]
list of options for natbib
.SS Variables for ConTeXt
.PP
Pandoc uses these variables when creating a PDF with ConTeXt.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]fontsize\f[B]\f[R]
-font size for body text (e.g.\ \f[C]10pt\f[R], \f[C]12pt\f[R])
+\f[V]fontsize\f[R]
+font size for body text (e.g.\ \f[V]10pt\f[R], \f[V]12pt\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]headertext\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]footertext\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]headertext\f[R], \f[V]footertext\f[R]
text to be placed in running header or footer (see ConTeXt Headers and
Footers); repeat up to four times for different placement
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]indenting\f[B]\f[R]
-controls indentation of paragraphs, e.g.\ \f[C]yes,small,next\f[R] (see
+\f[V]indenting\f[R]
+controls indentation of paragraphs, e.g.\ \f[V]yes,small,next\f[R] (see
ConTeXt Indentation); repeat for multiple options
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]interlinespace\f[B]\f[R]
-adjusts line spacing, e.g.\ \f[C]4ex\f[R] (using
-\f[C]setupinterlinespace\f[R]); repeat for multiple options
+\f[V]interlinespace\f[R]
+adjusts line spacing, e.g.\ \f[V]4ex\f[R] (using
+\f[V]setupinterlinespace\f[R]); repeat for multiple options
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]layout\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]layout\f[R]
options for page margins and text arrangement (see ConTeXt Layout);
repeat for multiple options
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]linkcolor\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]contrastcolor\f[B]\f[R]
-color for links outside and inside a page, e.g.\ \f[C]red\f[R],
-\f[C]blue\f[R] (see ConTeXt Color)
+\f[V]linkcolor\f[R], \f[V]contrastcolor\f[R]
+color for links outside and inside a page, e.g.\ \f[V]red\f[R],
+\f[V]blue\f[R] (see ConTeXt Color)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]linkstyle\f[B]\f[R]
-typeface style for links, e.g.\ \f[C]normal\f[R], \f[C]bold\f[R],
-\f[C]slanted\f[R], \f[C]boldslanted\f[R], \f[C]type\f[R], \f[C]cap\f[R],
-\f[C]small\f[R]
+\f[V]linkstyle\f[R]
+typeface style for links, e.g.\ \f[V]normal\f[R], \f[V]bold\f[R],
+\f[V]slanted\f[R], \f[V]boldslanted\f[R], \f[V]type\f[R], \f[V]cap\f[R],
+\f[V]small\f[R]
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]lof\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]lot\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]lof\f[R], \f[V]lot\f[R]
include list of figures, list of tables
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]mainfont\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]sansfont\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]monofont\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]mathfont\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]mainfont\f[R], \f[V]sansfont\f[R], \f[V]monofont\f[R], \f[V]mathfont\f[R]
font families: take the name of any system font (see ConTeXt Font
Switching)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]margin-left\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-right\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-top\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-bottom\f[B]\f[R]
-sets margins, if \f[C]layout\f[R] is not used (otherwise
-\f[C]layout\f[R] overrides these)
+\f[V]margin-left\f[R], \f[V]margin-right\f[R], \f[V]margin-top\f[R], \f[V]margin-bottom\f[R]
+sets margins, if \f[V]layout\f[R] is not used (otherwise
+\f[V]layout\f[R] overrides these)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]pagenumbering\f[B]\f[R]
-page number style and location (using \f[C]setuppagenumbering\f[R]);
+\f[V]pagenumbering\f[R]
+page number style and location (using \f[V]setuppagenumbering\f[R]);
repeat for multiple options
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]papersize\f[B]\f[R]
-paper size, e.g.\ \f[C]letter\f[R], \f[C]A4\f[R], \f[C]landscape\f[R]
+\f[V]papersize\f[R]
+paper size, e.g.\ \f[V]letter\f[R], \f[V]A4\f[R], \f[V]landscape\f[R]
(see ConTeXt Paper Setup); repeat for multiple options
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]pdfa\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]pdfa\f[R]
adds to the preamble the setup necessary to generate PDF/A of the type
-specified, e.g.\ \f[C]1a:2005\f[R], \f[C]2a\f[R].
+specified, e.g.\ \f[V]1a:2005\f[R], \f[V]2a\f[R].
If no type is specified (i.e.\ the value is set to True, by e.g.
-\f[C]--metadata=pdfa\f[R] or \f[C]pdfa: true\f[R] in a YAML metadata
-block), \f[C]1b:2005\f[R] will be used as default, for reasons of
+\f[V]--metadata=pdfa\f[R] or \f[V]pdfa: true\f[R] in a YAML metadata
+block), \f[V]1b:2005\f[R] will be used as default, for reasons of
backwards compatibility.
-Using \f[C]--variable=pdfa\f[R] without specified value is not
+Using \f[V]--variable=pdfa\f[R] without specified value is not
supported.
To successfully generate PDF/A the required ICC color profiles have to
be available and the content and all included files (such as images)
have to be standard conforming.
The ICC profiles and output intent may be specified using the variables
-\f[C]pdfaiccprofile\f[R] and \f[C]pdfaintent\f[R].
+\f[V]pdfaiccprofile\f[R] and \f[V]pdfaintent\f[R].
See also ConTeXt PDFA for more details.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]pdfaiccprofile\f[B]\f[R]
-when used in conjunction with \f[C]pdfa\f[R], specifies the ICC profile
-to use in the PDF, e.g.\ \f[C]default.cmyk\f[R].
-If left unspecified, \f[C]sRGB.icc\f[R] is used as default.
+\f[V]pdfaiccprofile\f[R]
+when used in conjunction with \f[V]pdfa\f[R], specifies the ICC profile
+to use in the PDF, e.g.\ \f[V]default.cmyk\f[R].
+If left unspecified, \f[V]sRGB.icc\f[R] is used as default.
May be repeated to include multiple profiles.
Note that the profiles have to be available on the system.
They can be obtained from ConTeXt ICC Profiles.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]pdfaintent\f[B]\f[R]
-when used in conjunction with \f[C]pdfa\f[R], specifies the output
+\f[V]pdfaintent\f[R]
+when used in conjunction with \f[V]pdfa\f[R], specifies the output
intent for the colors,
-e.g.\ \f[C]ISO coated v2 300\[rs]letterpercent\[rs]space (ECI)\f[R] If
-left unspecified, \f[C]sRGB IEC61966-2.1\f[R] is used as default.
+e.g.\ \f[V]ISO coated v2 300\[rs]letterpercent\[rs]space (ECI)\f[R] If
+left unspecified, \f[V]sRGB IEC61966-2.1\f[R] is used as default.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]toc\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]toc\f[R]
include table of contents (can also be set using
-\f[C]--toc/--table-of-contents\f[R])
+\f[V]--toc/--table-of-contents\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]whitespace\f[B]\f[R]
-spacing between paragraphs, e.g.\ \f[C]none\f[R], \f[C]small\f[R] (using
-\f[C]setupwhitespace\f[R])
+\f[V]whitespace\f[R]
+spacing between paragraphs, e.g.\ \f[V]none\f[R], \f[V]small\f[R] (using
+\f[V]setupwhitespace\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]includesource\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]includesource\f[R]
include all source documents as file attachments in the PDF file
-.SS Variables for \f[C]wkhtmltopdf\f[R]
+.SS Variables for \f[V]wkhtmltopdf\f[R]
.PP
Pandoc uses these variables when creating a PDF with
-\f[C]wkhtmltopdf\f[R].
-The \f[C]--css\f[R] option also affects the output.
+\f[V]wkhtmltopdf\f[R].
+The \f[V]--css\f[R] option also affects the output.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]footer-html\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]header-html\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]footer-html\f[R], \f[V]header-html\f[R]
add information to the header and footer
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]margin-left\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-right\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-top\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]margin-bottom\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]margin-left\f[R], \f[V]margin-right\f[R], \f[V]margin-top\f[R], \f[V]margin-bottom\f[R]
set the page margins
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]papersize\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]papersize\f[R]
sets the PDF paper size
.SS Variables for man pages
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]adjusting\f[B]\f[R]
-adjusts text to left (\f[C]l\f[R]), right (\f[C]r\f[R]), center
-(\f[C]c\f[R]), or both (\f[C]b\f[R]) margins
+\f[V]adjusting\f[R]
+adjusts text to left (\f[V]l\f[R]), right (\f[V]r\f[R]), center
+(\f[V]c\f[R]), or both (\f[V]b\f[R]) margins
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]footer\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]footer\f[R]
footer in man pages
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]header\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]header\f[R]
header in man pages
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]hyphenate\f[B]\f[R]
-if \f[C]true\f[R] (the default), hyphenation will be used
+\f[V]hyphenate\f[R]
+if \f[V]true\f[R] (the default), hyphenation will be used
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]section\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]section\f[R]
section number in man pages
.SS Variables for ms
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]fontfamily\f[B]\f[R]
-font family (e.g.\ \f[C]T\f[R] or \f[C]P\f[R])
+\f[V]fontfamily\f[R]
+font family (e.g.\ \f[V]T\f[R] or \f[V]P\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]indent\f[B]\f[R]
-paragraph indent (e.g.\ \f[C]2m\f[R])
+\f[V]indent\f[R]
+paragraph indent (e.g.\ \f[V]2m\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]lineheight\f[B]\f[R]
-line height (e.g.\ \f[C]12p\f[R])
+\f[V]lineheight\f[R]
+line height (e.g.\ \f[V]12p\f[R])
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]pointsize\f[B]\f[R]
-point size (e.g.\ \f[C]10p\f[R])
+\f[V]pointsize\f[R]
+point size (e.g.\ \f[V]10p\f[R])
.SS Variables set automatically
.PP
Pandoc sets these variables automatically in response to options or
document contents; users can also modify them.
These vary depending on the output format, and include the following:
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]body\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]body\f[R]
body of document
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]date-meta\f[B]\f[R]
-the \f[C]date\f[R] variable converted to ISO 8601 YYYY-MM-DD, included
+\f[V]date-meta\f[R]
+the \f[V]date\f[R] variable converted to ISO 8601 YYYY-MM-DD, included
in all HTML based formats (dzslides, epub, html, html4, html5, revealjs,
s5, slideous, slidy).
-The recognized formats for \f[C]date\f[R] are: \f[C]mm/dd/yyyy\f[R],
-\f[C]mm/dd/yy\f[R], \f[C]yyyy-mm-dd\f[R] (ISO 8601),
-\f[C]dd MM yyyy\f[R] (e.g.\ either \f[C]02 Apr 2018\f[R] or
-\f[C]02 April 2018\f[R]), \f[C]MM dd, yyyy\f[R]
-(e.g.\ \f[C]Apr. 02, 2018\f[R] or
-\f[C]April 02, 2018),\f[R]yyyy[mm[dd]]]\f[C](e.g.\f[R]20180402,
-\f[C]201804\f[R] or \f[C]2018\f[R]).
+The recognized formats for \f[V]date\f[R] are: \f[V]mm/dd/yyyy\f[R],
+\f[V]mm/dd/yy\f[R], \f[V]yyyy-mm-dd\f[R] (ISO 8601),
+\f[V]dd MM yyyy\f[R] (e.g.\ either \f[V]02 Apr 2018\f[R] or
+\f[V]02 April 2018\f[R]), \f[V]MM dd, yyyy\f[R]
+(e.g.\ \f[V]Apr. 02, 2018\f[R] or
+\f[V]April 02, 2018),\f[R]yyyy[mm[dd]]]\f[V](e.g.\f[R]20180402,
+\f[V]201804\f[R] or \f[V]2018\f[R]).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]header-includes\f[B]\f[R]
-contents specified by \f[C]-H/--include-in-header\f[R] (may have
+\f[V]header-includes\f[R]
+contents specified by \f[V]-H/--include-in-header\f[R] (may have
multiple values)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]include-before\f[B]\f[R]
-contents specified by \f[C]-B/--include-before-body\f[R] (may have
+\f[V]include-before\f[R]
+contents specified by \f[V]-B/--include-before-body\f[R] (may have
multiple values)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]include-after\f[B]\f[R]
-contents specified by \f[C]-A/--include-after-body\f[R] (may have
+\f[V]include-after\f[R]
+contents specified by \f[V]-A/--include-after-body\f[R] (may have
multiple values)
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]meta-json\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]meta-json\f[R]
JSON representation of all of the document\[cq]s metadata.
Field values are transformed to the selected output format.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]numbersections\f[B]\f[R]
-non-null value if \f[C]-N/--number-sections\f[R] was specified
+\f[V]numbersections\f[R]
+non-null value if \f[V]-N/--number-sections\f[R] was specified
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]sourcefile\f[B]\f[R], \f[B]\f[CB]outputfile\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]sourcefile\f[R], \f[V]outputfile\f[R]
source and destination filenames, as given on the command line.
-\f[C]sourcefile\f[R] can also be a list if input comes from multiple
+\f[V]sourcefile\f[R] can also be a list if input comes from multiple
files, or empty if input is from stdin.
You can use the following snippet in your template to distinguish them:
.RS
@@ -4333,19 +4760,19 @@ $endif$
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Similarly, \f[C]outputfile\f[R] can be \f[C]-\f[R] if output goes to the
+Similarly, \f[V]outputfile\f[R] can be \f[V]-\f[R] if output goes to the
terminal.
.PP
-If you need absolute paths, use e.g.\ \f[C]$curdir$/$sourcefile$\f[R].
+If you need absolute paths, use e.g.\ \f[V]$curdir$/$sourcefile$\f[R].
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]curdir\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]curdir\f[R]
working directory from which pandoc is run.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]toc\f[B]\f[R]
-non-null value if \f[C]--toc/--table-of-contents\f[R] was specified
+\f[V]toc\f[R]
+non-null value if \f[V]--toc/--table-of-contents\f[R] was specified
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]toc-title\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]toc-title\f[R]
title of table of contents (works only with EPUB, HTML, revealjs,
opendocument, odt, docx, pptx, beamer, LaTeX)
.SH EXTENSIONS
@@ -4353,59 +4780,59 @@ opendocument, odt, docx, pptx, beamer, LaTeX)
The behavior of some of the readers and writers can be adjusted by
enabling or disabling various extensions.
.PP
-An extension can be enabled by adding \f[C]+EXTENSION\f[R] to the format
-name and disabled by adding \f[C]-EXTENSION\f[R].
-For example, \f[C]--from markdown_strict+footnotes\f[R] is strict
+An extension can be enabled by adding \f[V]+EXTENSION\f[R] to the format
+name and disabled by adding \f[V]-EXTENSION\f[R].
+For example, \f[V]--from markdown_strict+footnotes\f[R] is strict
Markdown with footnotes enabled, while
-\f[C]--from markdown-footnotes-pipe_tables\f[R] is pandoc\[cq]s Markdown
+\f[V]--from markdown-footnotes-pipe_tables\f[R] is pandoc\[cq]s Markdown
without footnotes or pipe tables.
.PP
The markdown reader and writer make by far the most use of extensions.
Extensions only used by them are therefore covered in the section
Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown below (See Markdown variants for
-\f[C]commonmark\f[R] and \f[C]gfm\f[R].)
+\f[V]commonmark\f[R] and \f[V]gfm\f[R].)
In the following, extensions that also work for other formats are
covered.
.PP
-Note that markdown extensions added to the \f[C]ipynb\f[R] format affect
+Note that markdown extensions added to the \f[V]ipynb\f[R] format affect
Markdown cells in Jupyter notebooks (as do command-line options like
-\f[C]--atx-headers\f[R]).
+\f[V]--atx-headers\f[R]).
.SS Typography
-.SS Extension: \f[C]smart\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]smart\f[R]
.PP
-Interpret straight quotes as curly quotes, \f[C]---\f[R] as em-dashes,
-\f[C]--\f[R] as en-dashes, and \f[C]...\f[R] as ellipses.
+Interpret straight quotes as curly quotes, \f[V]---\f[R] as em-dashes,
+\f[V]--\f[R] as en-dashes, and \f[V]...\f[R] as ellipses.
Nonbreaking spaces are inserted after certain abbreviations, such as
\[lq]Mr.\[rq]
.PP
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
.TP
input formats
-\f[C]markdown\f[R], \f[C]commonmark\f[R], \f[C]latex\f[R],
-\f[C]mediawiki\f[R], \f[C]org\f[R], \f[C]rst\f[R], \f[C]twiki\f[R]
+\f[V]markdown\f[R], \f[V]commonmark\f[R], \f[V]latex\f[R],
+\f[V]mediawiki\f[R], \f[V]org\f[R], \f[V]rst\f[R], \f[V]twiki\f[R]
.TP
output formats
-\f[C]markdown\f[R], \f[C]latex\f[R], \f[C]context\f[R], \f[C]rst\f[R]
+\f[V]markdown\f[R], \f[V]latex\f[R], \f[V]context\f[R], \f[V]rst\f[R]
.TP
enabled by default in
-\f[C]markdown\f[R], \f[C]latex\f[R], \f[C]context\f[R] (both input and
+\f[V]markdown\f[R], \f[V]latex\f[R], \f[V]context\f[R] (both input and
output)
.PP
-Note: If you are \f[I]writing\f[R] Markdown, then the \f[C]smart\f[R]
+Note: If you are \f[I]writing\f[R] Markdown, then the \f[V]smart\f[R]
extension has the reverse effect: what would have been curly quotes
comes out straight.
.PP
-In LaTeX, \f[C]smart\f[R] means to use the standard TeX ligatures for
-quotation marks (\f[C]\[ga]\[ga]\f[R] and \f[C]\[aq]\[aq]\f[R] for
-double quotes, \f[C]\[ga]\f[R] and \f[C]\[aq]\f[R] for single quotes)
-and dashes (\f[C]--\f[R] for en-dash and \f[C]---\f[R] for em-dash).
-If \f[C]smart\f[R] is disabled, then in reading LaTeX pandoc will parse
+In LaTeX, \f[V]smart\f[R] means to use the standard TeX ligatures for
+quotation marks (\f[V]\[ga]\[ga]\f[R] and \f[V]\[aq]\[aq]\f[R] for
+double quotes, \f[V]\[ga]\f[R] and \f[V]\[aq]\f[R] for single quotes)
+and dashes (\f[V]--\f[R] for en-dash and \f[V]---\f[R] for em-dash).
+If \f[V]smart\f[R] is disabled, then in reading LaTeX pandoc will parse
these characters literally.
-In writing LaTeX, enabling \f[C]smart\f[R] tells pandoc to use the
-ligatures when possible; if \f[C]smart\f[R] is disabled pandoc will use
+In writing LaTeX, enabling \f[V]smart\f[R] tells pandoc to use the
+ligatures when possible; if \f[V]smart\f[R] is disabled pandoc will use
unicode quotation mark and dash characters.
.SS Headings and sections
-.SS Extension: \f[C]auto_identifiers\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]auto_identifiers\f[R]
.PP
A heading without an explicitly specified identifier will be
automatically assigned a unique identifier based on the heading text.
@@ -4413,14 +4840,14 @@ automatically assigned a unique identifier based on the heading text.
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
.TP
input formats
-\f[C]markdown\f[R], \f[C]latex\f[R], \f[C]rst\f[R], \f[C]mediawiki\f[R],
-\f[C]textile\f[R]
+\f[V]markdown\f[R], \f[V]latex\f[R], \f[V]rst\f[R], \f[V]mediawiki\f[R],
+\f[V]textile\f[R]
.TP
output formats
-\f[C]markdown\f[R], \f[C]muse\f[R]
+\f[V]markdown\f[R], \f[V]muse\f[R]
.TP
enabled by default in
-\f[C]markdown\f[R], \f[C]muse\f[R]
+\f[V]markdown\f[R], \f[V]muse\f[R]
.PP
The default algorithm used to derive the identifier from the heading
text is:
@@ -4439,7 +4866,7 @@ Convert all alphabetic characters to lowercase.
Remove everything up to the first letter (identifiers may not begin with
a number or punctuation mark).
.IP \[bu] 2
-If nothing is left after this, use the identifier \f[C]section\f[R].
+If nothing is left after this, use the identifier \f[V]section\f[R].
.PP
Thus, for example,
.PP
@@ -4453,34 +4880,34 @@ Identifier
T}
_
T{
-\f[C]Heading identifiers in HTML\f[R]
+\f[V]Heading identifiers in HTML\f[R]
T}@T{
-\f[C]heading-identifiers-in-html\f[R]
+\f[V]heading-identifiers-in-html\f[R]
T}
T{
-\f[C]Ma\[^i]tre d\[aq]h\[^o]tel\f[R]
+\f[V]Ma\[^i]tre d\[aq]h\[^o]tel\f[R]
T}@T{
-\f[C]ma\[^i]tre-dh\[^o]tel\f[R]
+\f[V]ma\[^i]tre-dh\[^o]tel\f[R]
T}
T{
-\f[C]*Dogs*?--in *my* house?\f[R]
+\f[V]*Dogs*?--in *my* house?\f[R]
T}@T{
-\f[C]dogs--in-my-house\f[R]
+\f[V]dogs--in-my-house\f[R]
T}
T{
-\f[C][HTML], [S5], or [RTF]?\f[R]
+\f[V][HTML], [S5], or [RTF]?\f[R]
T}@T{
-\f[C]html-s5-or-rtf\f[R]
+\f[V]html-s5-or-rtf\f[R]
T}
T{
-\f[C]3. Applications\f[R]
+\f[V]3. Applications\f[R]
T}@T{
-\f[C]applications\f[R]
+\f[V]applications\f[R]
T}
T{
-\f[C]33\f[R]
+\f[V]33\f[R]
T}@T{
-\f[C]section\f[R]
+\f[V]section\f[R]
T}
.TE
.PP
@@ -4488,14 +4915,14 @@ These rules should, in most cases, allow one to determine the identifier
from the heading text.
The exception is when several headings have the same text; in this case,
the first will get an identifier as described above; the second will get
-the same identifier with \f[C]-1\f[R] appended; the third with
-\f[C]-2\f[R]; and so on.
+the same identifier with \f[V]-1\f[R] appended; the third with
+\f[V]-2\f[R]; and so on.
.PP
(However, a different algorithm is used if
-\f[C]gfm_auto_identifiers\f[R] is enabled; see below.)
+\f[V]gfm_auto_identifiers\f[R] is enabled; see below.)
.PP
These identifiers are used to provide link targets in the table of
-contents generated by the \f[C]--toc|--table-of-contents\f[R] option.
+contents generated by the \f[V]--toc|--table-of-contents\f[R] option.
They also make it easy to provide links from one section of a document
to another.
A link to this section, for example, might look like this:
@@ -4510,32 +4937,32 @@ See the section on
Note, however, that this method of providing links to sections works
only in HTML, LaTeX, and ConTeXt formats.
.PP
-If the \f[C]--section-divs\f[R] option is specified, then each section
-will be wrapped in a \f[C]section\f[R] (or a \f[C]div\f[R], if
-\f[C]html4\f[R] was specified), and the identifier will be attached to
-the enclosing \f[C]<section>\f[R] (or \f[C]<div>\f[R]) tag rather than
+If the \f[V]--section-divs\f[R] option is specified, then each section
+will be wrapped in a \f[V]section\f[R] (or a \f[V]div\f[R], if
+\f[V]html4\f[R] was specified), and the identifier will be attached to
+the enclosing \f[V]<section>\f[R] (or \f[V]<div>\f[R]) tag rather than
the heading itself.
This allows entire sections to be manipulated using JavaScript or
treated differently in CSS.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]ascii_identifiers\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]ascii_identifiers\f[R]
.PP
-Causes the identifiers produced by \f[C]auto_identifiers\f[R] to be pure
+Causes the identifiers produced by \f[V]auto_identifiers\f[R] to be pure
ASCII.
Accents are stripped off of accented Latin letters, and non-Latin
letters are omitted.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]gfm_auto_identifiers\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]gfm_auto_identifiers\f[R]
.PP
-Changes the algorithm used by \f[C]auto_identifiers\f[R] to conform to
+Changes the algorithm used by \f[V]auto_identifiers\f[R] to conform to
GitHub\[cq]s method.
-Spaces are converted to dashes (\f[C]-\f[R]), uppercase characters to
-lowercase characters, and punctuation characters other than \f[C]-\f[R]
-and \f[C]_\f[R] are removed.
+Spaces are converted to dashes (\f[V]-\f[R]), uppercase characters to
+lowercase characters, and punctuation characters other than \f[V]-\f[R]
+and \f[V]_\f[R] are removed.
Emojis are replaced by their names.
.SS Math Input
.PP
-The extensions \f[C]tex_math_dollars\f[R],
-\f[C]tex_math_single_backslash\f[R], and
-\f[C]tex_math_double_backslash\f[R] are described in the section about
+The extensions \f[V]tex_math_dollars\f[R],
+\f[V]tex_math_single_backslash\f[R], and
+\f[V]tex_math_double_backslash\f[R] are described in the section about
Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown.
.PP
However, they can also be used with HTML input.
@@ -4546,71 +4973,71 @@ example.
The following extensions are described in more detail in their
respective sections of Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown:
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]raw_html\f[R] allows HTML elements which are not representable in
+\f[V]raw_html\f[R] allows HTML elements which are not representable in
pandoc\[cq]s AST to be parsed as raw HTML.
By default, this is disabled for HTML input.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]raw_tex\f[R] allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to be included in a
+\f[V]raw_tex\f[R] allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to be included in a
document.
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats (in
-addition to \f[C]markdown\f[R]):
+addition to \f[V]markdown\f[R]):
.RS 2
.TP
input formats
-\f[C]latex\f[R], \f[C]textile\f[R], \f[C]html\f[R] (environments,
-\f[C]\[rs]ref\f[R], and \f[C]\[rs]eqref\f[R] only), \f[C]ipynb\f[R]
+\f[V]latex\f[R], \f[V]textile\f[R], \f[V]html\f[R] (environments,
+\f[V]\[rs]ref\f[R], and \f[V]\[rs]eqref\f[R] only), \f[V]ipynb\f[R]
.TP
output formats
-\f[C]textile\f[R], \f[C]commonmark\f[R]
+\f[V]textile\f[R], \f[V]commonmark\f[R]
.PP
-Note: as applied to \f[C]ipynb\f[R], \f[C]raw_html\f[R] and
-\f[C]raw_tex\f[R] affect not only raw TeX in markdown cells, but data
-with mime type \f[C]text/html\f[R] in output cells.
-Since the \f[C]ipynb\f[R] reader attempts to preserve the richest
+Note: as applied to \f[V]ipynb\f[R], \f[V]raw_html\f[R] and
+\f[V]raw_tex\f[R] affect not only raw TeX in markdown cells, but data
+with mime type \f[V]text/html\f[R] in output cells.
+Since the \f[V]ipynb\f[R] reader attempts to preserve the richest
possible outputs when several options are given, you will get best
-results if you disable \f[C]raw_html\f[R] and \f[C]raw_tex\f[R] when
-converting to formats like \f[C]docx\f[R] which don\[cq]t allow raw
-\f[C]html\f[R] or \f[C]tex\f[R].
+results if you disable \f[V]raw_html\f[R] and \f[V]raw_tex\f[R] when
+converting to formats like \f[V]docx\f[R] which don\[cq]t allow raw
+\f[V]html\f[R] or \f[V]tex\f[R].
.RE
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]native_divs\f[R] causes HTML \f[C]div\f[R] elements to be parsed as
+\f[V]native_divs\f[R] causes HTML \f[V]div\f[R] elements to be parsed as
native pandoc Div blocks.
If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use
-\f[C]-f html-native_divs+raw_html\f[R].
+\f[V]-f html-native_divs+raw_html\f[R].
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]native_spans\f[R] causes HTML \f[C]span\f[R] elements to be parsed
+\f[V]native_spans\f[R] causes HTML \f[V]span\f[R] elements to be parsed
as native pandoc Span inlines.
If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use
-\f[C]-f html-native_spans+raw_html\f[R].
-If you want to drop all \f[C]div\f[R]s and \f[C]span\f[R]s when
+\f[V]-f html-native_spans+raw_html\f[R].
+If you want to drop all \f[V]div\f[R]s and \f[V]span\f[R]s when
converting HTML to Markdown, you can use
-\f[C]pandoc -f html-native_divs-native_spans -t markdown\f[R].
+\f[V]pandoc -f html-native_divs-native_spans -t markdown\f[R].
.SS Literate Haskell support
-.SS Extension: \f[C]literate_haskell\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]literate_haskell\f[R]
.PP
Treat the document as literate Haskell source.
.PP
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
.TP
input formats
-\f[C]markdown\f[R], \f[C]rst\f[R], \f[C]latex\f[R]
+\f[V]markdown\f[R], \f[V]rst\f[R], \f[V]latex\f[R]
.TP
output formats
-\f[C]markdown\f[R], \f[C]rst\f[R], \f[C]latex\f[R], \f[C]html\f[R]
+\f[V]markdown\f[R], \f[V]rst\f[R], \f[V]latex\f[R], \f[V]html\f[R]
.PP
-If you append \f[C]+lhs\f[R] (or \f[C]+literate_haskell\f[R]) to one of
+If you append \f[V]+lhs\f[R] (or \f[V]+literate_haskell\f[R]) to one of
the formats above, pandoc will treat the document as literate Haskell
source.
This means that
.IP \[bu] 2
In Markdown input, \[lq]bird track\[rq] sections will be parsed as
Haskell code rather than block quotations.
-Text between \f[C]\[rs]begin{code}\f[R] and \f[C]\[rs]end{code}\f[R]
+Text between \f[V]\[rs]begin{code}\f[R] and \f[V]\[rs]end{code}\f[R]
will also be treated as Haskell code.
For ATX-style headings the character `=' will be used instead of `#'.
.IP \[bu] 2
-In Markdown output, code blocks with classes \f[C]haskell\f[R] and
-\f[C]literate\f[R] will be rendered using bird tracks, and block
+In Markdown output, code blocks with classes \f[V]haskell\f[R] and
+\f[V]literate\f[R] will be rendered using bird tracks, and block
quotations will be indented one space, so they will not be treated as
Haskell code.
In addition, headings will be rendered setext-style (with underlines)
@@ -4621,17 +5048,17 @@ line numbers.)
In restructured text input, \[lq]bird track\[rq] sections will be parsed
as Haskell code.
.IP \[bu] 2
-In restructured text output, code blocks with class \f[C]haskell\f[R]
+In restructured text output, code blocks with class \f[V]haskell\f[R]
will be rendered using bird tracks.
.IP \[bu] 2
-In LaTeX input, text in \f[C]code\f[R] environments will be parsed as
+In LaTeX input, text in \f[V]code\f[R] environments will be parsed as
Haskell code.
.IP \[bu] 2
-In LaTeX output, code blocks with class \f[C]haskell\f[R] will be
-rendered inside \f[C]code\f[R] environments.
+In LaTeX output, code blocks with class \f[V]haskell\f[R] will be
+rendered inside \f[V]code\f[R] environments.
.IP \[bu] 2
-In HTML output, code blocks with class \f[C]haskell\f[R] will be
-rendered with class \f[C]literatehaskell\f[R] and bird tracks.
+In HTML output, code blocks with class \f[V]haskell\f[R] will be
+rendered with class \f[V]literatehaskell\f[R] and bird tracks.
.PP
Examples:
.IP
@@ -4657,7 +5084,7 @@ Note that GHC expects the bird tracks in the first column, so indented
literate code blocks (e.g.\ inside an itemized environment) will not be
picked up by the Haskell compiler.
.SS Other extensions
-.SS Extension: \f[C]empty_paragraphs\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]empty_paragraphs\f[R]
.PP
Allows empty paragraphs.
By default empty paragraphs are omitted.
@@ -4665,11 +5092,11 @@ By default empty paragraphs are omitted.
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
.TP
input formats
-\f[C]docx\f[R], \f[C]html\f[R]
+\f[V]docx\f[R], \f[V]html\f[R]
.TP
output formats
-\f[C]docx\f[R], \f[C]odt\f[R], \f[C]opendocument\f[R], \f[C]html\f[R]
-.SS Extension: \f[C]native_numbering\f[R]
+\f[V]docx\f[R], \f[V]odt\f[R], \f[V]opendocument\f[R], \f[V]html\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]native_numbering\f[R]
.PP
Enables native numbering of figures and tables.
Enumeration starts at 1.
@@ -4677,15 +5104,15 @@ Enumeration starts at 1.
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
.TP
output formats
-\f[C]odt\f[R], \f[C]opendocument\f[R], \f[C]docx\f[R]
-.SS Extension: \f[C]xrefs_name\f[R]
+\f[V]odt\f[R], \f[V]opendocument\f[R], \f[V]docx\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]xrefs_name\f[R]
.PP
Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
substituted with cross-references that will use the name or caption of
the referenced item.
The original link text is replaced once the generated document is
refreshed.
-This extension can be combined with \f[C]xrefs_number\f[R] in which case
+This extension can be combined with \f[V]xrefs_number\f[R] in which case
numbers will appear before the name.
.PP
Text in cross-references is only made consistent with the referenced
@@ -4694,19 +5121,19 @@ item once the document has been refreshed.
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
.TP
output formats
-\f[C]odt\f[R], \f[C]opendocument\f[R]
-.SS Extension: \f[C]xrefs_number\f[R]
+\f[V]odt\f[R], \f[V]opendocument\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]xrefs_number\f[R]
.PP
Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
substituted with cross-references that will use the number of the
referenced item.
The original link text is discarded.
-This extension can be combined with \f[C]xrefs_name\f[R] in which case
+This extension can be combined with \f[V]xrefs_name\f[R] in which case
the name or caption numbers will appear after the number.
.PP
-For the \f[C]xrefs_number\f[R] to be useful heading numbers must be
+For the \f[V]xrefs_number\f[R] to be useful heading numbers must be
enabled in the generated document, also table and figure captions must
-be enabled using for example the \f[C]native_numbering\f[R] extension.
+be enabled using for example the \f[V]native_numbering\f[R] extension.
.PP
Numbers in cross-references are only visible in the final document once
it has been refreshed.
@@ -4714,8 +5141,8 @@ it has been refreshed.
This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
.TP
output formats
-\f[C]odt\f[R], \f[C]opendocument\f[R]
-.SS Extension: \f[C]styles\f[R]
+\f[V]odt\f[R], \f[V]opendocument\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]styles\f[R]
.PP
When converting from docx, read all docx styles as divs (for paragraph
styles) and spans (for character styles) regardless of whether pandoc
@@ -4724,42 +5151,42 @@ This can be used with docx custom styles.
Disabled by default.
.TP
input formats
-\f[C]docx\f[R]
-.SS Extension: \f[C]amuse\f[R]
+\f[V]docx\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]amuse\f[R]
.PP
-In the \f[C]muse\f[R] input format, this enables Text::Amuse extensions
+In the \f[V]muse\f[R] input format, this enables Text::Amuse extensions
to Emacs Muse markup.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]raw_markdown\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]raw_markdown\f[R]
.PP
-In the \f[C]ipynb\f[R] input format, this causes Markdown cells to be
+In the \f[V]ipynb\f[R] input format, this causes Markdown cells to be
included as raw Markdown blocks (allowing lossless round-tripping)
rather than being parsed.
-Use this only when you are targeting \f[C]ipynb\f[R] or a markdown-based
+Use this only when you are targeting \f[V]ipynb\f[R] or a markdown-based
output format.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]citations\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]citations\f[R]
.PP
Some aspects of Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown citation syntax are also accepted
-in \f[C]org\f[R] input.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]fancy_lists\f[R]
+in \f[V]org\f[R] input.
+.SS Extension: \f[V]fancy_lists\f[R]
.PP
Some aspects of Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown fancy lists are also accepted in
-\f[C]org\f[R] input, mimicking the option
-\f[C]org-list-allow-alphabetical\f[R] in Emacs.
+\f[V]org\f[R] input, mimicking the option
+\f[V]org-list-allow-alphabetical\f[R] in Emacs.
As in Org Mode, enabling this extension allows lowercase and uppercase
alphabetical markers for ordered lists to be parsed in addition to
arabic ones.
Note that for Org, this does not include roman numerals or the
-\f[C]#\f[R] placeholder that are enabled by the extension in
+\f[V]#\f[R] placeholder that are enabled by the extension in
Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]element_citations\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]element_citations\f[R]
.PP
-In the \f[C]jats\f[R] output formats, this causes reference items to be
-replaced with \f[C]<element-citation>\f[R] elements.
+In the \f[V]jats\f[R] output formats, this causes reference items to be
+replaced with \f[V]<element-citation>\f[R] elements.
These elements are not influenced by CSL styles, but all information on
the item is included in tags.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]ntb\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]ntb\f[R]
.PP
-In the \f[C]context\f[R] output format this enables the use of Natural
+In the \f[V]context\f[R] output format this enables the use of Natural
Tables (TABLE) instead of the default Extreme Tables (xtables).
Natural tables allow more fine-grained global customization but come at
a performance penalty compared to extreme tables.
@@ -4770,7 +5197,7 @@ Gruber\[cq]s Markdown syntax.
This document explains the syntax, noting differences from original
Markdown.
Except where noted, these differences can be suppressed by using the
-\f[C]markdown_strict\f[R] format instead of \f[C]markdown\f[R].
+\f[V]markdown_strict\f[R] format instead of \f[V]markdown\f[R].
Extensions can be enabled or disabled to specify the behavior more
granularly.
They are described in the following.
@@ -4806,7 +5233,7 @@ Newlines are treated as spaces, so you can reflow your paragraphs as you
like.
If you need a hard line break, put two or more spaces at the end of a
line.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]escaped_line_breaks\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]escaped_line_breaks\f[R]
.PP
A backslash followed by a newline is also a hard line break.
Note: in multiline and grid table cells, this is the only way to create
@@ -4817,7 +5244,7 @@ There are two kinds of headings: Setext and ATX.
.SS Setext-style headings
.PP
A setext-style heading is a line of text \[lq]underlined\[rq] with a row
-of \f[C]=\f[R] signs (for a level-one heading) or \f[C]-\f[R] signs (for
+of \f[V]=\f[R] signs (for a level-one heading) or \f[V]-\f[R] signs (for
a level-two heading):
.IP
.nf
@@ -4834,9 +5261,9 @@ The heading text can contain inline formatting, such as emphasis (see
Inline formatting, below).
.SS ATX-style headings
.PP
-An ATX-style heading consists of one to six \f[C]#\f[R] signs and a line
-of text, optionally followed by any number of \f[C]#\f[R] signs.
-The number of \f[C]#\f[R] signs at the beginning of the line is the
+An ATX-style heading consists of one to six \f[V]#\f[R] signs and a line
+of text, optionally followed by any number of \f[V]#\f[R] signs.
+The number of \f[V]#\f[R] signs at the beginning of the line is the
heading level:
.IP
.nf
@@ -4854,13 +5281,13 @@ As with setext-style headings, the heading text can contain formatting:
# A level-one heading with a [link](/url) and *emphasis*
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]blank_before_header\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]blank_before_header\f[R]
.PP
Original Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a heading.
Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
document).
The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
-\f[C]#\f[R] to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps
+\f[V]#\f[R] to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps
through line wrapping).
Consider, for example:
.IP
@@ -4870,16 +5297,16 @@ I like several of their flavors of ice cream:
#22, for example, and #5.
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]space_in_atx_header\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]space_in_atx_header\f[R]
.PP
Many Markdown implementations do not require a space between the opening
-\f[C]#\f[R]s of an ATX heading and the heading text, so that
-\f[C]#5 bolt\f[R] and \f[C]#hashtag\f[R] count as headings.
+\f[V]#\f[R]s of an ATX heading and the heading text, so that
+\f[V]#5 bolt\f[R] and \f[V]#hashtag\f[R] count as headings.
With this extension, pandoc does require the space.
.SS Heading identifiers
.PP
-See also the \f[C]auto_identifiers\f[R] extension above.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]header_attributes\f[R]
+See also the \f[V]auto_identifiers\f[R] extension above.
+.SS Extension: \f[V]header_attributes\f[R]
.PP
Headings can be assigned attributes using this syntax at the end of the
line containing the heading text:
@@ -4891,7 +5318,7 @@ line containing the heading text:
.fi
.PP
Thus, for example, the following headings will all be assigned the
-identifier \f[C]foo\f[R]:
+identifier \f[V]foo\f[R]:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -4914,10 +5341,10 @@ HTML-based formats such as EPUB and slidy.
Identifiers are used for labels and link anchors in the LaTeX, ConTeXt,
Textile, Jira markup, and AsciiDoc writers.
.PP
-Headings with the class \f[C]unnumbered\f[R] will not be numbered, even
-if \f[C]--number-sections\f[R] is specified.
-A single hyphen (\f[C]-\f[R]) in an attribute context is equivalent to
-\f[C].unnumbered\f[R], and preferable in non-English documents.
+Headings with the class \f[V]unnumbered\f[R] will not be numbered, even
+if \f[V]--number-sections\f[R] is specified.
+A single hyphen (\f[V]-\f[R]) in an attribute context is equivalent to
+\f[V].unnumbered\f[R], and preferable in non-English documents.
So,
.IP
.nf
@@ -4934,12 +5361,12 @@ is just the same as
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-If the \f[C]unlisted\f[R] class is present in addition to
-\f[C]unnumbered\f[R], the heading will not be included in a table of
+If the \f[V]unlisted\f[R] class is present in addition to
+\f[V]unnumbered\f[R], the heading will not be included in a table of
contents.
(Currently this feature is only implemented for certain formats: those
based on LaTeX and HTML, PowerPoint, and RTF.)
-.SS Extension: \f[C]implicit_header_references\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]implicit_header_references\f[R]
.PP
Pandoc behaves as if reference links have been defined for each heading.
So, to link to a heading
@@ -4991,8 +5418,8 @@ Like regular reference links, these references are case-insensitive.
.PP
Explicit link reference definitions always take priority over implicit
heading references.
-So, in the following example, the link will point to \f[C]bar\f[R], not
-to \f[C]#foo\f[R]:
+So, in the following example, the link will point to \f[V]bar\f[R], not
+to \f[V]#foo\f[R]:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -5007,9 +5434,9 @@ See [foo]
.PP
Markdown uses email conventions for quoting blocks of text.
A block quotation is one or more paragraphs or other block elements
-(such as lists or headings), with each line preceded by a \f[C]>\f[R]
+(such as lists or headings), with each line preceded by a \f[V]>\f[R]
character and an optional space.
-(The \f[C]>\f[R] need not start at the left margin, but it should not be
+(The \f[V]>\f[R] need not start at the left margin, but it should not be
indented more than three spaces.)
.IP
.nf
@@ -5022,7 +5449,7 @@ indented more than three spaces.)
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-A \[lq]lazy\[rq] form, which requires the \f[C]>\f[R] character only on
+A \[lq]lazy\[rq] form, which requires the \f[V]>\f[R] character only on
the first line of each block, is also allowed:
.IP
.nf
@@ -5047,27 +5474,27 @@ That is, block quotes can be nested:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-If the \f[C]>\f[R] character is followed by an optional space, that
+If the \f[V]>\f[R] character is followed by an optional space, that
space will be considered part of the block quote marker and not part of
the indentation of the contents.
Thus, to put an indented code block in a block quote, you need five
-spaces after the \f[C]>\f[R]:
+spaces after the \f[V]>\f[R]:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
> code
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]blank_before_blockquote\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]blank_before_blockquote\f[R]
.PP
Original Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a block
quote.
Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
document).
The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
-\f[C]>\f[R] to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps
+\f[V]>\f[R] to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps
through line wrapping).
-So, unless the \f[C]markdown_strict\f[R] format is used, the following
+So, unless the \f[V]markdown_strict\f[R] format is used, the following
does not produce a nested block quote in pandoc:
.IP
.nf
@@ -5097,11 +5524,11 @@ of the verbatim text, and is removed in the output.
.PP
Note: blank lines in the verbatim text need not begin with four spaces.
.SS Fenced code blocks
-.SS Extension: \f[C]fenced_code_blocks\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]fenced_code_blocks\f[R]
.PP
In addition to standard indented code blocks, pandoc supports
\f[I]fenced\f[R] code blocks.
-These begin with a row of three or more tildes (\f[C]\[ti]\f[R]) and end
+These begin with a row of three or more tildes (\f[V]\[ti]\f[R]) and end
with a row of tildes that must be at least as long as the starting row.
Everything between these lines is treated as code.
No indentation is necessary:
@@ -5131,11 +5558,11 @@ code including tildes
\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]backtick_code_blocks\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]backtick_code_blocks\f[R]
.PP
-Same as \f[C]fenced_code_blocks\f[R], but uses backticks
-(\f[C]\[ga]\f[R]) instead of tildes (\f[C]\[ti]\f[R]).
-.SS Extension: \f[C]fenced_code_attributes\f[R]
+Same as \f[V]fenced_code_blocks\f[R], but uses backticks
+(\f[V]\[ga]\f[R]) instead of tildes (\f[V]\[ti]\f[R]).
+.SS Extension: \f[V]fenced_code_attributes\f[R]
.PP
Optionally, you may attach attributes to fenced or backtick code block
using this syntax:
@@ -5150,16 +5577,16 @@ qsort (x:xs) = qsort (filter (< x) xs) ++ [x] ++
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Here \f[C]mycode\f[R] is an identifier, \f[C]haskell\f[R] and
-\f[C]numberLines\f[R] are classes, and \f[C]startFrom\f[R] is an
-attribute with value \f[C]100\f[R].
+Here \f[V]mycode\f[R] is an identifier, \f[V]haskell\f[R] and
+\f[V]numberLines\f[R] are classes, and \f[V]startFrom\f[R] is an
+attribute with value \f[V]100\f[R].
Some output formats can use this information to do syntax highlighting.
Currently, the only output formats that uses this information are HTML,
LaTeX, Docx, Ms, and PowerPoint.
If highlighting is supported for your output format and language, then
the code block above will appear highlighted, with numbered lines.
(To see which languages are supported, type
-\f[C]pandoc --list-highlight-languages\f[R].)
+\f[V]pandoc --list-highlight-languages\f[R].)
Otherwise, the code block above will appear as follows:
.IP
.nf
@@ -5172,10 +5599,10 @@ Otherwise, the code block above will appear as follows:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The \f[C]numberLines\f[R] (or \f[C]number-lines\f[R]) class will cause
-the lines of the code block to be numbered, starting with \f[C]1\f[R] or
-the value of the \f[C]startFrom\f[R] attribute.
-The \f[C]lineAnchors\f[R] (or \f[C]line-anchors\f[R]) class will cause
+The \f[V]numberLines\f[R] (or \f[V]number-lines\f[R]) class will cause
+the lines of the code block to be numbered, starting with \f[V]1\f[R] or
+the value of the \f[V]startFrom\f[R] attribute.
+The \f[V]lineAnchors\f[R] (or \f[V]line-anchors\f[R]) class will cause
the lines to be clickable anchors in HTML output.
.PP
A shortcut form can also be used for specifying the language of the code
@@ -5199,18 +5626,18 @@ qsort [] = []
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-If the \f[C]fenced_code_attributes\f[R] extension is disabled, but input
+If the \f[V]fenced_code_attributes\f[R] extension is disabled, but input
contains class attribute(s) for the code block, the first class
attribute will be printed after the opening fence as a bare word.
.PP
-To prevent all highlighting, use the \f[C]--no-highlight\f[R] flag.
-To set the highlighting style, use \f[C]--highlight-style\f[R].
+To prevent all highlighting, use the \f[V]--no-highlight\f[R] flag.
+To set the highlighting style, use \f[V]--highlight-style\f[R].
For more information on highlighting, see Syntax highlighting, below.
.SS Line blocks
-.SS Extension: \f[C]line_blocks\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]line_blocks\f[R]
.PP
A line block is a sequence of lines beginning with a vertical bar
-(\f[C]|\f[R]) followed by a space.
+(\f[V]|\f[R]) followed by a space.
The division into lines will be preserved in the output, as will any
leading spaces; otherwise, the lines will be formatted as Markdown.
This is useful for verse and addresses:
@@ -5248,8 +5675,8 @@ This syntax is borrowed from reStructuredText.
.SS Bullet lists
.PP
A bullet list is a list of bulleted list items.
-A bulleted list item begins with a bullet (\f[C]*\f[R], \f[C]+\f[R], or
-\f[C]-\f[R]).
+A bulleted list item begins with a bullet (\f[V]*\f[R], \f[V]+\f[R], or
+\f[V]-\f[R]).
Here is a simple example:
.IP
.nf
@@ -5395,7 +5822,7 @@ and this one:
1. three
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]fancy_lists\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]fancy_lists\f[R]
.PP
Unlike original Markdown, pandoc allows ordered list items to be marked
with uppercase and lowercase letters and roman numerals, in addition to
@@ -5406,7 +5833,7 @@ They must be separated from the text that follows by at least one space,
and, if the list marker is a capital letter with a period, by at least
two spaces.
.PP
-The \f[C]fancy_lists\f[R] extension also allows `\f[C]#\f[R]' to be used
+The \f[V]fancy_lists\f[R] extension also allows `\f[V]#\f[R]' to be used
as an ordered list marker in place of a numeral:
.IP
.nf
@@ -5415,7 +5842,7 @@ as an ordered list marker in place of a numeral:
#. two
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]startnum\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]startnum\f[R]
.PP
Pandoc also pays attention to the type of list marker used, and to the
starting number, and both of these are preserved where possible in the
@@ -5448,7 +5875,7 @@ So, the following will create three lists:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-If default list markers are desired, use \f[C]#.\f[R]:
+If default list markers are desired, use \f[V]#.\f[R]:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -5457,7 +5884,7 @@ If default list markers are desired, use \f[C]#.\f[R]:
#. three
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]task_lists\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]task_lists\f[R]
.PP
Pandoc supports task lists, using the syntax of GitHub-Flavored
Markdown.
@@ -5469,7 +5896,7 @@ Markdown.
\f[R]
.fi
.SS Definition lists
-.SS Extension: \f[C]definition_lists\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]definition_lists\f[R]
.PP
Pandoc supports definition lists, using the syntax of PHP Markdown Extra
with some extensions.
@@ -5535,17 +5962,17 @@ Term 2
.PP
Note that space between items in a definition list is required.
(A variant that loosens this requirement, but disallows \[lq]lazy\[rq]
-hard wrapping, can be activated with \f[C]compact_definition_lists\f[R]:
+hard wrapping, can be activated with \f[V]compact_definition_lists\f[R]:
see Non-default extensions, below.)
.SS Numbered example lists
-.SS Extension: \f[C]example_lists\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]example_lists\f[R]
.PP
-The special list marker \f[C]\[at]\f[R] can be used for sequentially
+The special list marker \f[V]\[at]\f[R] can be used for sequentially
numbered examples.
-The first list item with a \f[C]\[at]\f[R] marker will be numbered `1',
+The first list item with a \f[V]\[at]\f[R] marker will be numbered `1',
the next `2', and so on, throughout the document.
The numbered examples need not occur in a single list; each new list
-using \f[C]\[at]\f[R] will take up where the last stopped.
+using \f[V]\[at]\f[R] will take up where the last stopped.
So, for example:
.IP
.nf
@@ -5575,7 +6002,7 @@ hyphens.
.PP
Note: continuation paragraphs in example lists must always be indented
four spaces, regardless of the length of the list marker.
-That is, example lists always behave as if the \f[C]four_space_rule\f[R]
+That is, example lists always behave as if the \f[V]four_space_rule\f[R]
extension is set.
This is because example labels tend to be long, and indenting content to
the first non-space character after the label would be awkward.
@@ -5594,7 +6021,7 @@ What if you want to put an indented code block after a list?
.PP
Trouble!
Here pandoc (like other Markdown implementations) will treat
-\f[C]{ my code block }\f[R] as the second paragraph of item two, and not
+\f[V]{ my code block }\f[R] as the second paragraph of item two, and not
as a code block.
.PP
To \[lq]cut off\[rq] the list after item two, you can insert some
@@ -5630,8 +6057,8 @@ one big list:
.fi
.SS Horizontal rules
.PP
-A line containing a row of three or more \f[C]*\f[R], \f[C]-\f[R], or
-\f[C]_\f[R] characters (optionally separated by spaces) produces a
+A line containing a row of three or more \f[V]*\f[R], \f[V]-\f[R], or
+\f[V]_\f[R] characters (optionally separated by spaces) produces a
horizontal rule:
.IP
.nf
@@ -5648,14 +6075,14 @@ The first three kinds presuppose the use of a fixed-width font, such as
Courier.
The fourth kind can be used with proportionally spaced fonts, as it does
not require lining up columns.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]table_captions\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]table_captions\f[R]
.PP
A caption may optionally be provided with all 4 kinds of tables (as
illustrated in the examples below).
-A caption is a paragraph beginning with the string \f[C]Table:\f[R] (or
-just \f[C]:\f[R]), which will be stripped off.
+A caption is a paragraph beginning with the string \f[V]Table:\f[R] (or
+just \f[V]:\f[R]), which will be stripped off.
It may appear either before or after the table.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]simple_tables\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]simple_tables\f[R]
.PP
Simple tables look like this:
.IP
@@ -5708,7 +6135,7 @@ When the header row is omitted, column alignments are determined on the
basis of the first line of the table body.
So, in the tables above, the columns would be right, left, center, and
right aligned, respectively.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]multiline_tables\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]multiline_tables\f[R]
.PP
Multiline tables allow header and table rows to span multiple lines of
text (but cells that span multiple columns or rows of the table are not
@@ -5769,7 +6196,7 @@ The header may be omitted in multiline tables as well as simple tables:
It is possible for a multiline table to have just one row, but the row
should be followed by a blank line (and then the row of dashes that ends
the table), or the table may be interpreted as a simple table.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]grid_tables\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]grid_tables\f[R]
.PP
Grid tables look like this:
.IP
@@ -5789,13 +6216,13 @@ Grid tables look like this:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The row of \f[C]=\f[R]s separates the header from the table body, and
+The row of \f[V]=\f[R]s separates the header from the table body, and
can be omitted for a headerless table.
The cells of grid tables may contain arbitrary block elements (multiple
paragraphs, code blocks, lists, etc.).
Cells that span multiple columns or rows are not supported.
Grid tables can be created easily using Emacs\[cq] table-mode
-(\f[C]M-x table-insert\f[R]).
+(\f[V]M-x table-insert\f[R]).
.PP
Alignments can be specified as with pipe tables, by putting colons at
the boundaries of the separator line after the header:
@@ -5828,7 +6255,7 @@ All grid tables must have the same number of columns in each row, and
the same number of rows in each column.
For example, the Docutils sample grid tables will not render as expected
with Pandoc.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]pipe_tables\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]pipe_tables\f[R]
.PP
Pipe tables look like this:
.IP
@@ -5868,11 +6295,11 @@ orange|3.09
The cells of pipe tables cannot contain block elements like paragraphs
and lists, and cannot span multiple lines.
If any line of the markdown source is longer than the column width (see
-\f[C]--columns\f[R]), then the table will take up the full text width
+\f[V]--columns\f[R]), then the table will take up the full text width
and the cell contents will wrap, with the relative cell widths
determined by the number of dashes in the line separating the table
header from the table body.
-(For example \f[C]---|-\f[R] would make the first column 3/4 and the
+(For example \f[V]---|-\f[R] would make the first column 3/4 and the
second column 1/4 of the full text width.)
On the other hand, if no lines are wider than column width, then cell
contents will not be wrapped, and the cells will be sized to their
@@ -5890,12 +6317,12 @@ be produced by Emacs\[cq] orgtbl-mode:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The difference is that \f[C]+\f[R] is used instead of \f[C]|\f[R].
+The difference is that \f[V]+\f[R] is used instead of \f[V]|\f[R].
Other orgtbl features are not supported.
In particular, to get non-default column alignment, you\[cq]ll need to
add colons as above.
.SS Metadata blocks
-.SS Extension: \f[C]pandoc_title_block\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]pandoc_title_block\f[R]
.PP
If the file begins with a title block
.IP
@@ -5970,15 +6397,15 @@ All three metadata fields may contain standard inline formatting
(italics, links, footnotes, etc.).
.PP
Title blocks will always be parsed, but they will affect the output only
-when the \f[C]--standalone\f[R] (\f[C]-s\f[R]) option is chosen.
+when the \f[V]--standalone\f[R] (\f[V]-s\f[R]) option is chosen.
In HTML output, titles will appear twice: once in the document head
\[en] this is the title that will appear at the top of the window in a
browser \[en] and once at the beginning of the document body.
The title in the document head can have an optional prefix attached
-(\f[C]--title-prefix\f[R] or \f[C]-T\f[R] option).
+(\f[V]--title-prefix\f[R] or \f[V]-T\f[R] option).
The title in the body appears as an H1 element with class
\[lq]title\[rq], so it can be suppressed or reformatted with CSS.
-If a title prefix is specified with \f[C]-T\f[R] and no title block
+If a title prefix is specified with \f[V]-T\f[R] and no title block
appears in the document, the title prefix will be used by itself as the
HTML title.
.PP
@@ -5988,7 +6415,7 @@ The title is assumed to be the first word on the title line, which may
optionally end with a (single-digit) section number in parentheses.
(There should be no space between the title and the parentheses.)
Anything after this is assumed to be additional footer and header text.
-A single pipe character (\f[C]|\f[R]) should be used to separate the
+A single pipe character (\f[V]|\f[R]) should be used to separate the
footer text from the header text.
Thus,
.IP
@@ -5998,7 +6425,7 @@ Thus,
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-will yield a man page with the title \f[C]PANDOC\f[R] and section 1.
+will yield a man page with the title \f[V]PANDOC\f[R] and section 1.
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6015,11 +6442,11 @@ will also have \[lq]Pandoc User Manuals\[rq] in the footer.
.fi
.PP
will also have \[lq]Version 4.0\[rq] in the header.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]yaml_metadata_block\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]yaml_metadata_block\f[R]
.PP
A YAML metadata block is a valid YAML object, delimited by a line of
-three hyphens (\f[C]---\f[R]) at the top and a line of three hyphens
-(\f[C]---\f[R]) or three dots (\f[C]...\f[R]) at the bottom.
+three hyphens (\f[V]---\f[R]) at the top and a line of three hyphens
+(\f[V]---\f[R]) or three dots (\f[V]...\f[R]) at the bottom.
A YAML metadata block may occur anywhere in the document, but if it is
not at the beginning, it must be preceded by a blank line.
(Note that, because of the way pandoc concatenates input files when
@@ -6033,9 +6460,9 @@ pandoc chap1.md chap2.md chap3.md metadata.yaml -s -o book.html
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Just be sure that the YAML file begins with \f[C]---\f[R] and ends with
-\f[C]---\f[R] or \f[C]...\f[R].)
-Alternatively, you can use the \f[C]--metadata-file\f[R] option.
+Just be sure that the YAML file begins with \f[V]---\f[R] and ends with
+\f[V]---\f[R] or \f[V]...\f[R].)
+Alternatively, you can use the \f[V]--metadata-file\f[R] option.
Using that approach however, you cannot reference content (like
footnotes) from the main markdown input document.
.PP
@@ -6046,7 +6473,7 @@ string scalars will be interpreted as Markdown.
Fields with names ending in an underscore will be ignored by pandoc.
(They may be given a role by external processors.)
Field names must not be interpretable as YAML numbers or boolean values
-(so, for example, \f[C]yes\f[R], \f[C]True\f[R], and \f[C]15\f[R] cannot
+(so, for example, \f[V]yes\f[R], \f[V]True\f[R], and \f[V]15\f[R] cannot
be used as field names).
.PP
A document may contain multiple metadata blocks.
@@ -6058,9 +6485,9 @@ document.
This means, for example, that any YAML anchors defined in a block cannot
be referenced in another block.
.PP
-When pandoc is used with \f[C]-t markdown\f[R] to create a Markdown
+When pandoc is used with \f[V]-t markdown\f[R] to create a Markdown
document, a YAML metadata block will be produced only if the
-\f[C]-s/--standalone\f[R] option is used.
+\f[V]-s/--standalone\f[R] option is used.
All of the metadata will appear in a single block at the beginning of
the document.
.PP
@@ -6068,7 +6495,7 @@ Note that YAML escaping rules must be followed.
Thus, for example, if a title contains a colon, it must be quoted, and
if it contains a backslash escape, then it must be ensured that it is
not treated as a YAML escape sequence.
-The pipe character (\f[C]|\f[R]) can be used to begin an indented block
+The pipe character (\f[V]|\f[R]) can be used to begin an indented block
that will be interpreted literally, without need for escaping.
This form is necessary when the field contains blank lines or
block-level formatting:
@@ -6089,16 +6516,16 @@ abstract: |
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The literal block after the \f[C]|\f[R] must be indented relative to the
-line containing the \f[C]|\f[R].
+The literal block after the \f[V]|\f[R] must be indented relative to the
+line containing the \f[V]|\f[R].
If it is not, the YAML will be invalid and pandoc will not interpret it
as metadata.
For an overview of the complex rules governing YAML, see the Wikipedia
entry on YAML syntax.
.PP
Template variables will be set automatically from the metadata.
-Thus, for example, in writing HTML, the variable \f[C]abstract\f[R] will
-be set to the HTML equivalent of the Markdown in the \f[C]abstract\f[R]
+Thus, for example, in writing HTML, the variable \f[V]abstract\f[R] will
+be set to the HTML equivalent of the Markdown in the \f[V]abstract\f[R]
field:
.IP
.nf
@@ -6110,7 +6537,7 @@ field:
.PP
Variables can contain arbitrary YAML structures, but the template must
match this structure.
-The \f[C]author\f[R] variable in the default templates expects a simple
+The \f[V]author\f[R] variable in the default templates expects a simple
list or string, but can be changed to support more complicated
structures.
The following combination, for example, would add an affiliation to the
@@ -6145,9 +6572,9 @@ $endfor$
.fi
.PP
Raw content to include in the document\[cq]s header may be specified
-using \f[C]header-includes\f[R]; however, it is important to mark up
+using \f[V]header-includes\f[R]; however, it is important to mark up
this content as raw code for a particular output format, using the
-\f[C]raw_attribute\f[R] extension), or it will be interpreted as
+\f[V]raw_attribute\f[R] extension), or it will be interpreted as
markdown.
For example:
.IP
@@ -6162,9 +6589,9 @@ header-includes:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Note: the \f[C]yaml_metadata_block\f[R] extension works with
-\f[C]commonmark\f[R] as well as \f[C]markdown\f[R] (and it is enabled by
-default in \f[C]gfm\f[R] and \f[C]commonmark_x\f[R]).
+Note: the \f[V]yaml_metadata_block\f[R] extension works with
+\f[V]commonmark\f[R] as well as \f[V]markdown\f[R] (and it is enabled by
+default in \f[V]gfm\f[R] and \f[V]commonmark_x\f[R]).
However, in these formats the following restrictions apply:
.IP \[bu] 2
The YAML metadata block must occur at the beginning of the document (and
@@ -6177,7 +6604,7 @@ other and from the rest of the document.
So, for example, you can\[cq]t use a reference link in these contexts if
the link definition is somewhere else in the document.
.SS Backslash escapes
-.SS Extension: \f[C]all_symbols_escapable\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]all_symbols_escapable\f[R]
.PP
Except inside a code block or inline code, any punctuation or space
character preceded by a backslash will be treated literally, even if it
@@ -6215,21 +6642,21 @@ allows only the following characters to be backslash-escaped:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-(However, if the \f[C]markdown_strict\f[R] format is used, the original
+(However, if the \f[V]markdown_strict\f[R] format is used, the original
Markdown rule will be used.)
.PP
A backslash-escaped space is parsed as a nonbreaking space.
-In TeX output, it will appear as \f[C]\[ti]\f[R].
+In TeX output, it will appear as \f[V]\[ti]\f[R].
In HTML and XML output, it will appear as a literal unicode nonbreaking
space character (note that it will thus actually look
\[lq]invisible\[rq] in the generated HTML source; you can still use the
-\f[C]--ascii\f[R] command-line option to make it appear as an explicit
+\f[V]--ascii\f[R] command-line option to make it appear as an explicit
entity).
.PP
A backslash-escaped newline (i.e.\ a backslash occurring at the end of a
line) is parsed as a hard line break.
-It will appear in TeX output as \f[C]\[rs]\[rs]\f[R] and in HTML as
-\f[C]<br />\f[R].
+It will appear in TeX output as \f[V]\[rs]\[rs]\f[R] and in HTML as
+\f[V]<br />\f[R].
This is a nice alternative to Markdown\[cq]s \[lq]invisible\[rq] way of
indicating hard line breaks using two trailing spaces on a line.
.PP
@@ -6237,8 +6664,8 @@ Backslash escapes do not work in verbatim contexts.
.SS Inline formatting
.SS Emphasis
.PP
-To \f[I]emphasize\f[R] some text, surround it with \f[C]*\f[R]s or
-\f[C]_\f[R], like this:
+To \f[I]emphasize\f[R] some text, surround it with \f[V]*\f[R]s or
+\f[V]_\f[R], like this:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6247,7 +6674,7 @@ is *emphasized with asterisks*.
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Double \f[C]*\f[R] or \f[C]_\f[R] produces \f[B]strong emphasis\f[R]:
+Double \f[V]*\f[R] or \f[V]_\f[R] produces \f[B]strong emphasis\f[R]:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6255,7 +6682,7 @@ This is **strong emphasis** and __with underscores__.
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-A \f[C]*\f[R] or \f[C]_\f[R] character surrounded by spaces, or
+A \f[V]*\f[R] or \f[V]_\f[R] character surrounded by spaces, or
backslash-escaped, will not trigger emphasis:
.IP
.nf
@@ -6263,12 +6690,12 @@ backslash-escaped, will not trigger emphasis:
This is * not emphasized *, and \[rs]*neither is this\[rs]*.
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]intraword_underscores\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]intraword_underscores\f[R]
.PP
-Because \f[C]_\f[R] is sometimes used inside words and identifiers,
-pandoc does not interpret a \f[C]_\f[R] surrounded by alphanumeric
+Because \f[V]_\f[R] is sometimes used inside words and identifiers,
+pandoc does not interpret a \f[V]_\f[R] surrounded by alphanumeric
characters as an emphasis marker.
-If you want to emphasize just part of a word, use \f[C]*\f[R]:
+If you want to emphasize just part of a word, use \f[V]*\f[R]:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6276,10 +6703,10 @@ feas*ible*, not feas*able*.
\f[R]
.fi
.SS Strikeout
-.SS Extension: \f[C]strikeout\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]strikeout\f[R]
.PP
To strikeout a section of text with a horizontal line, begin and end it
-with \f[C]\[ti]\[ti]\f[R].
+with \f[V]\[ti]\[ti]\f[R].
Thus, for example,
.IP
.nf
@@ -6288,11 +6715,11 @@ This \[ti]\[ti]is deleted text.\[ti]\[ti]
\f[R]
.fi
.SS Superscripts and subscripts
-.SS Extension: \f[C]superscript\f[R], \f[C]subscript\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]superscript\f[R], \f[V]subscript\f[R]
.PP
Superscripts may be written by surrounding the superscripted text by
-\f[C]\[ha]\f[R] characters; subscripts may be written by surrounding the
-subscripted text by \f[C]\[ti]\f[R] characters.
+\f[V]\[ha]\f[R] characters; subscripts may be written by surrounding the
+subscripted text by \f[V]\[ti]\f[R] characters.
Thus, for example,
.IP
.nf
@@ -6301,15 +6728,15 @@ H\[ti]2\[ti]O is a liquid. 2\[ha]10\[ha] is 1024.
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The text between \f[C]\[ha]...\[ha]\f[R] or \f[C]\[ti]...\[ti]\f[R] may
+The text between \f[V]\[ha]...\[ha]\f[R] or \f[V]\[ti]...\[ti]\f[R] may
not contain spaces or newlines.
If the superscripted or subscripted text contains spaces, these spaces
must be escaped with backslashes.
(This is to prevent accidental superscripting and subscripting through
-the ordinary use of \f[C]\[ti]\f[R] and \f[C]\[ha]\f[R], and also bad
+the ordinary use of \f[V]\[ti]\f[R] and \f[V]\[ha]\f[R], and also bad
interactions with footnotes.)
Thus, if you want the letter P with `a cat' in subscripts, use
-\f[C]P\[ti]a\[rs] cat\[ti]\f[R], not \f[C]P\[ti]a cat\[ti]\f[R].
+\f[V]P\[ti]a\[rs] cat\[ti]\f[R], not \f[V]P\[ti]a cat\[ti]\f[R].
.SS Verbatim
.PP
To make a short span of text verbatim, put it inside backticks:
@@ -6343,7 +6770,7 @@ in verbatim contexts:
This is a backslash followed by an asterisk: \[ga]\[rs]*\[ga].
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]inline_code_attributes\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]inline_code_attributes\f[R]
.PP
Attributes can be attached to verbatim text, just as with fenced code
blocks:
@@ -6355,7 +6782,7 @@ blocks:
.fi
.SS Underline
.PP
-To underline text, use the \f[C]underline\f[R] class:
+To underline text, use the \f[V]underline\f[R] class:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6363,8 +6790,8 @@ To underline text, use the \f[C]underline\f[R] class:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Or, without the \f[C]bracketed_spans\f[R] extension (but with
-\f[C]native_spans\f[R]):
+Or, without the \f[V]bracketed_spans\f[R] extension (but with
+\f[V]native_spans\f[R]):
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6375,7 +6802,7 @@ Or, without the \f[C]bracketed_spans\f[R] extension (but with
This will work in all output formats that support underline.
.SS Small caps
.PP
-To write small caps, use the \f[C]smallcaps\f[R] class:
+To write small caps, use the \f[V]smallcaps\f[R] class:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6383,7 +6810,7 @@ To write small caps, use the \f[C]smallcaps\f[R] class:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Or, without the \f[C]bracketed_spans\f[R] extension:
+Or, without the \f[V]bracketed_spans\f[R] extension:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6401,60 +6828,60 @@ For compatibility with other Markdown flavors, CSS is also supported:
.PP
This will work in all output formats that support small caps.
.SS Math
-.SS Extension: \f[C]tex_math_dollars\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]tex_math_dollars\f[R]
.PP
-Anything between two \f[C]$\f[R] characters will be treated as TeX math.
-The opening \f[C]$\f[R] must have a non-space character immediately to
-its right, while the closing \f[C]$\f[R] must have a non-space character
+Anything between two \f[V]$\f[R] characters will be treated as TeX math.
+The opening \f[V]$\f[R] must have a non-space character immediately to
+its right, while the closing \f[V]$\f[R] must have a non-space character
immediately to its left, and must not be followed immediately by a
digit.
-Thus, \f[C]$20,000 and $30,000\f[R] won\[cq]t parse as math.
-If for some reason you need to enclose text in literal \f[C]$\f[R]
+Thus, \f[V]$20,000 and $30,000\f[R] won\[cq]t parse as math.
+If for some reason you need to enclose text in literal \f[V]$\f[R]
characters, backslash-escape them and they won\[cq]t be treated as math
delimiters.
.PP
-For display math, use \f[C]$$\f[R] delimiters.
+For display math, use \f[V]$$\f[R] delimiters.
(In this case, the delimiters may be separated from the formula by
whitespace.
However, there can be no blank lines betwen the opening and closing
-\f[C]$$\f[R] delimiters.)
+\f[V]$$\f[R] delimiters.)
.PP
TeX math will be printed in all output formats.
How it is rendered depends on the output format:
.TP
LaTeX
-It will appear verbatim surrounded by \f[C]\[rs](...\[rs])\f[R] (for
-inline math) or \f[C]\[rs][...\[rs]]\f[R] (for display math).
+It will appear verbatim surrounded by \f[V]\[rs](...\[rs])\f[R] (for
+inline math) or \f[V]\[rs][...\[rs]]\f[R] (for display math).
.TP
Markdown, Emacs Org mode, ConTeXt, ZimWiki
-It will appear verbatim surrounded by \f[C]$...$\f[R] (for inline math)
-or \f[C]$$...$$\f[R] (for display math).
+It will appear verbatim surrounded by \f[V]$...$\f[R] (for inline math)
+or \f[V]$$...$$\f[R] (for display math).
.TP
XWiki
It will appear verbatim surrounded by
-\f[C]{{formula}}..{{/formula}}\f[R].
+\f[V]{{formula}}..{{/formula}}\f[R].
.TP
reStructuredText
-It will be rendered using an interpreted text role \f[C]:math:\f[R].
+It will be rendered using an interpreted text role \f[V]:math:\f[R].
.TP
AsciiDoc
-For AsciiDoc output format (\f[C]-t asciidoc\f[R]) it will appear
-verbatim surrounded by \f[C]latexmath:[$...$]\f[R] (for inline math) or
-\f[C][latexmath]++++\[rs][...\[rs]]+++\f[R] (for display math).
-For AsciiDoctor output format (\f[C]-t asciidoctor\f[R]) the LaTex
-delimiters (\f[C]$..$\f[R] and \f[C]\[rs][..\[rs]]\f[R]) are omitted.
+For AsciiDoc output format (\f[V]-t asciidoc\f[R]) it will appear
+verbatim surrounded by \f[V]latexmath:[$...$]\f[R] (for inline math) or
+\f[V][latexmath]++++\[rs][...\[rs]]+++\f[R] (for display math).
+For AsciiDoctor output format (\f[V]-t asciidoctor\f[R]) the LaTex
+delimiters (\f[V]$..$\f[R] and \f[V]\[rs][..\[rs]]\f[R]) are omitted.
.TP
Texinfo
-It will be rendered inside a \f[C]\[at]math\f[R] command.
+It will be rendered inside a \f[V]\[at]math\f[R] command.
.TP
roff man, Jira markup
-It will be rendered verbatim without \f[C]$\f[R]\[cq]s.
+It will be rendered verbatim without \f[V]$\f[R]\[cq]s.
.TP
MediaWiki, DokuWiki
-It will be rendered inside \f[C]<math>\f[R] tags.
+It will be rendered inside \f[V]<math>\f[R] tags.
.TP
Textile
-It will be rendered inside \f[C]<span class=\[dq]math\[dq]>\f[R] tags.
+It will be rendered inside \f[V]<span class=\[dq]math\[dq]>\f[R] tags.
.TP
RTF, OpenDocument
It will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters, and will
@@ -6464,15 +6891,15 @@ ODT
It will be rendered, if possible, using MathML.
.TP
DocBook
-If the \f[C]--mathml\f[R] flag is used, it will be rendered using MathML
-in an \f[C]inlineequation\f[R] or \f[C]informalequation\f[R] tag.
+If the \f[V]--mathml\f[R] flag is used, it will be rendered using MathML
+in an \f[V]inlineequation\f[R] or \f[V]informalequation\f[R] tag.
Otherwise it will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters.
.TP
Docx
It will be rendered using OMML math markup.
.TP
FictionBook2
-If the \f[C]--webtex\f[R] option is used, formulas are rendered as
+If the \f[V]--webtex\f[R] option is used, formulas are rendered as
images using CodeCogs or other compatible web service, downloaded and
embedded in the e-book.
Otherwise, they will appear verbatim.
@@ -6482,11 +6909,11 @@ The way math is rendered in HTML will depend on the command-line options
selected.
Therefore see Math rendering in HTML above.
.SS Raw HTML
-.SS Extension: \f[C]raw_html\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]raw_html\f[R]
.PP
Markdown allows you to insert raw HTML (or DocBook) anywhere in a
-document (except verbatim contexts, where \f[C]<\f[R], \f[C]>\f[R], and
-\f[C]&\f[R] are interpreted literally).
+document (except verbatim contexts, where \f[V]<\f[R], \f[V]>\f[R], and
+\f[V]&\f[R] are interpreted literally).
(Technically this is not an extension, since standard Markdown allows
it, but it has been made an extension so that it can be disabled if
desired.)
@@ -6496,23 +6923,23 @@ DZSlides, EPUB, Markdown, CommonMark, Emacs Org mode, and Textile
output, and suppressed in other formats.
.PP
For a more explicit way of including raw HTML in a Markdown document,
-see the \f[C]raw_attribute\f[R] extension.
+see the \f[V]raw_attribute\f[R] extension.
.PP
-In the CommonMark format, if \f[C]raw_html\f[R] is enabled,
+In the CommonMark format, if \f[V]raw_html\f[R] is enabled,
superscripts, subscripts, strikeouts and small capitals will be
represented as HTML.
Otherwise, plain-text fallbacks will be used.
-Note that even if \f[C]raw_html\f[R] is disabled, tables will be
+Note that even if \f[V]raw_html\f[R] is disabled, tables will be
rendered with HTML syntax if they cannot use pipe syntax.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]markdown_in_html_blocks\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]markdown_in_html_blocks\f[R]
.PP
Original Markdown allows you to include HTML \[lq]blocks\[rq]: blocks of
HTML between balanced tags that are separated from the surrounding text
with blank lines, and start and end at the left margin.
Within these blocks, everything is interpreted as HTML, not Markdown; so
-(for example), \f[C]*\f[R] does not signify emphasis.
+(for example), \f[V]*\f[R] does not signify emphasis.
.PP
-Pandoc behaves this way when the \f[C]markdown_strict\f[R] format is
+Pandoc behaves this way when the \f[V]markdown_strict\f[R] format is
used; but by default, pandoc interprets material between HTML block tags
as Markdown.
Thus, for example, pandoc will turn
@@ -6541,32 +6968,32 @@ into
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-whereas \f[C]Markdown.pl\f[R] will preserve it as is.
+whereas \f[V]Markdown.pl\f[R] will preserve it as is.
.PP
-There is one exception to this rule: text between \f[C]<script>\f[R],
-\f[C]<style>\f[R], and \f[C]<textarea>\f[R] tags is not interpreted as
+There is one exception to this rule: text between \f[V]<script>\f[R],
+\f[V]<style>\f[R], and \f[V]<textarea>\f[R] tags is not interpreted as
Markdown.
.PP
This departure from original Markdown should make it easier to mix
Markdown with HTML block elements.
For example, one can surround a block of Markdown text with
-\f[C]<div>\f[R] tags without preventing it from being interpreted as
+\f[V]<div>\f[R] tags without preventing it from being interpreted as
Markdown.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]native_divs\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]native_divs\f[R]
.PP
-Use native pandoc \f[C]Div\f[R] blocks for content inside
-\f[C]<div>\f[R] tags.
+Use native pandoc \f[V]Div\f[R] blocks for content inside
+\f[V]<div>\f[R] tags.
For the most part this should give the same output as
-\f[C]markdown_in_html_blocks\f[R], but it makes it easier to write
+\f[V]markdown_in_html_blocks\f[R], but it makes it easier to write
pandoc filters to manipulate groups of blocks.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]native_spans\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]native_spans\f[R]
.PP
-Use native pandoc \f[C]Span\f[R] blocks for content inside
-\f[C]<span>\f[R] tags.
+Use native pandoc \f[V]Span\f[R] blocks for content inside
+\f[V]<span>\f[R] tags.
For the most part this should give the same output as
-\f[C]raw_html\f[R], but it makes it easier to write pandoc filters to
+\f[V]raw_html\f[R], but it makes it easier to write pandoc filters to
manipulate groups of inlines.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]raw_tex\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]raw_tex\f[R]
.PP
In addition to raw HTML, pandoc allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to be
included in a document.
@@ -6597,16 +7024,16 @@ the material between the begin and end tags will be interpreted as raw
LaTeX, not as Markdown.
.PP
For a more explicit and flexible way of including raw TeX in a Markdown
-document, see the \f[C]raw_attribute\f[R] extension.
+document, see the \f[V]raw_attribute\f[R] extension.
.PP
Inline LaTeX is ignored in output formats other than Markdown, LaTeX,
Emacs Org mode, and ConTeXt.
.SS Generic raw attribute
-.SS Extension: \f[C]raw_attribute\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]raw_attribute\f[R]
.PP
Inline spans and fenced code blocks with a special kind of attribute
will be parsed as raw content with the designated format.
-For example, the following produces a raw roff \f[C]ms\f[R] block:
+For example, the following produces a raw roff \f[V]ms\f[R] block:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6617,7 +7044,7 @@ blah blah
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-And the following produces a raw \f[C]html\f[R] inline element:
+And the following produces a raw \f[V]html\f[R] inline element:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6625,7 +7052,7 @@ This is \[ga]<a>html</a>\[ga]{=html}
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-This can be useful to insert raw xml into \f[C]docx\f[R] documents, e.g.
+This can be useful to insert raw xml into \f[V]docx\f[R] documents, e.g.
a pagebreak:
.IP
.nf
@@ -6641,22 +7068,22 @@ a pagebreak:
.fi
.PP
The format name should match the target format name (see
-\f[C]-t/--to\f[R], above, for a list, or use
-\f[C]pandoc --list-output-formats\f[R]).
-Use \f[C]openxml\f[R] for \f[C]docx\f[R] output, \f[C]opendocument\f[R]
-for \f[C]odt\f[R] output, \f[C]html5\f[R] for \f[C]epub3\f[R] output,
-\f[C]html4\f[R] for \f[C]epub2\f[R] output, and \f[C]latex\f[R],
-\f[C]beamer\f[R], \f[C]ms\f[R], or \f[C]html5\f[R] for \f[C]pdf\f[R]
-output (depending on what you use for \f[C]--pdf-engine\f[R]).
+\f[V]-t/--to\f[R], above, for a list, or use
+\f[V]pandoc --list-output-formats\f[R]).
+Use \f[V]openxml\f[R] for \f[V]docx\f[R] output, \f[V]opendocument\f[R]
+for \f[V]odt\f[R] output, \f[V]html5\f[R] for \f[V]epub3\f[R] output,
+\f[V]html4\f[R] for \f[V]epub2\f[R] output, and \f[V]latex\f[R],
+\f[V]beamer\f[R], \f[V]ms\f[R], or \f[V]html5\f[R] for \f[V]pdf\f[R]
+output (depending on what you use for \f[V]--pdf-engine\f[R]).
.PP
This extension presupposes that the relevant kind of inline code or
fenced code block is enabled.
Thus, for example, to use a raw attribute with a backtick code block,
-\f[C]backtick_code_blocks\f[R] must be enabled.
+\f[V]backtick_code_blocks\f[R] must be enabled.
.PP
The raw attribute cannot be combined with regular attributes.
.SS LaTeX macros
-.SS Extension: \f[C]latex_macros\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]latex_macros\f[R]
.PP
When this extension is enabled, pandoc will parse LaTeX macro
definitions and apply the resulting macros to all LaTeX math and raw
@@ -6673,17 +7100,17 @@ $\[rs]tuple{a, b, c}$
.fi
.PP
Note that LaTeX macros will not be applied if they occur inside a raw
-span or block marked with the \f[C]raw_attribute\f[R] extension.
+span or block marked with the \f[V]raw_attribute\f[R] extension.
.PP
-When \f[C]latex_macros\f[R] is disabled, the raw LaTeX and math will not
+When \f[V]latex_macros\f[R] is disabled, the raw LaTeX and math will not
have macros applied.
This is usually a better approach when you are targeting LaTeX or PDF.
.PP
Macro definitions in LaTeX will be passed through as raw LaTeX only if
-\f[C]latex_macros\f[R] is not enabled.
+\f[V]latex_macros\f[R] is not enabled.
Macro definitions in Markdown source (or other formats allowing
-\f[C]raw_tex\f[R]) will be passed through regardless of whether
-\f[C]latex_macros\f[R] is enabled.
+\f[V]raw_tex\f[R]) will be passed through regardless of whether
+\f[V]latex_macros\f[R] is enabled.
.SS Links
.PP
Markdown allows links to be specified in several ways.
@@ -6717,7 +7144,7 @@ The link text can contain formatting (such as emphasis), but the title
cannot.
.PP
Email addresses in inline links are not autodetected, so they have to be
-prefixed with \f[C]mailto\f[R]:
+prefixed with \f[V]mailto\f[R]:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -6733,12 +7160,12 @@ before or after the link).
The link consists of link text in square brackets, followed by a label
in square brackets.
(There cannot be space between the two unless the
-\f[C]spaced_reference_links\f[R] extension is enabled.)
+\f[V]spaced_reference_links\f[R] extension is enabled.)
The link definition consists of the bracketed label, followed by a colon
and a space, followed by the URL, and optionally (after a space) a link
title either in quotes or in parentheses.
The label must not be parseable as a citation (assuming the
-\f[C]citations\f[R] extension is enabled): citations take precedence
+\f[V]citations\f[R] extension is enabled): citations take precedence
over link labels.
.PP
Here are some examples:
@@ -6791,7 +7218,7 @@ See [my website][].
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Note: In \f[C]Markdown.pl\f[R] and most other Markdown implementations,
+Note: In \f[V]Markdown.pl\f[R] and most other Markdown implementations,
reference link definitions cannot occur in nested constructions such as
list items or block quotes.
Pandoc lifts this arbitrary seeming restriction.
@@ -6805,7 +7232,7 @@ implementations:
> [quote]: /foo
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]shortcut_reference_links\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]shortcut_reference_links\f[R]
.PP
In a \f[I]shortcut\f[R] reference link, the second pair of brackets may
be omitted entirely:
@@ -6843,7 +7270,7 @@ Internal links are currently supported for HTML formats (including HTML
slide shows and EPUB), LaTeX, and ConTeXt.
.SS Images
.PP
-A link immediately preceded by a \f[C]!\f[R] will be treated as an
+A link immediately preceded by a \f[V]!\f[R] will be treated as an
image.
The link text will be used as the image\[cq]s alt text:
.IP
@@ -6856,7 +7283,7 @@ The link text will be used as the image\[cq]s alt text:
[movie reel]: movie.gif
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]implicit_figures\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]implicit_figures\f[R]
.PP
An image with nonempty alt text, occurring by itself in a paragraph,
will be rendered as a figure with a caption.
@@ -6884,9 +7311,9 @@ One way to do this is to insert a nonbreaking space after the image:
.fi
.PP
Note that in reveal.js slide shows, an image in a paragraph by itself
-that has the \f[C]r-stretch\f[R] class will fill the screen, and the
+that has the \f[V]r-stretch\f[R] class will fill the screen, and the
caption and figure tags will be omitted.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]link_attributes\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]link_attributes\f[R]
.PP
Attributes can be set on links and images:
.IP
@@ -6900,22 +7327,22 @@ and a reference ![image][ref] with attributes.
.fi
.PP
(This syntax is compatible with PHP Markdown Extra when only
-\f[C]#id\f[R] and \f[C].class\f[R] are used.)
+\f[V]#id\f[R] and \f[V].class\f[R] are used.)
.PP
-For HTML and EPUB, all known HTML5 attributes except \f[C]width\f[R] and
-\f[C]height\f[R] (but including \f[C]srcset\f[R] and \f[C]sizes\f[R])
+For HTML and EPUB, all known HTML5 attributes except \f[V]width\f[R] and
+\f[V]height\f[R] (but including \f[V]srcset\f[R] and \f[V]sizes\f[R])
are passed through as is.
Unknown attributes are passed through as custom attributes, with
-\f[C]data-\f[R] prepended.
+\f[V]data-\f[R] prepended.
The other writers ignore attributes that are not specifically supported
by their output format.
.PP
-The \f[C]width\f[R] and \f[C]height\f[R] attributes on images are
+The \f[V]width\f[R] and \f[V]height\f[R] attributes on images are
treated specially.
When used without a unit, the unit is assumed to be pixels.
However, any of the following unit identifiers can be used:
-\f[C]px\f[R], \f[C]cm\f[R], \f[C]mm\f[R], \f[C]in\f[R], \f[C]inch\f[R]
-and \f[C]%\f[R].
+\f[V]px\f[R], \f[V]cm\f[R], \f[V]mm\f[R], \f[V]in\f[R], \f[V]inch\f[R]
+and \f[V]%\f[R].
There must not be any spaces between the number and the unit.
For example:
.IP
@@ -6929,47 +7356,47 @@ Dimensions may be converted to a form that is compatible with the output
format (for example, dimensions given in pixels will be converted to
inches when converting HTML to LaTeX).
Conversion between pixels and physical measurements is affected by the
-\f[C]--dpi\f[R] option (by default, 96 dpi is assumed, unless the image
+\f[V]--dpi\f[R] option (by default, 96 dpi is assumed, unless the image
itself contains dpi information).
.IP \[bu] 2
-The \f[C]%\f[R] unit is generally relative to some available space.
+The \f[V]%\f[R] unit is generally relative to some available space.
For example the above example will render to the following.
.RS 2
.IP \[bu] 2
HTML:
-\f[C]<img href=\[dq]file.jpg\[dq] style=\[dq]width: 50%;\[dq] />\f[R]
+\f[V]<img href=\[dq]file.jpg\[dq] style=\[dq]width: 50%;\[dq] />\f[R]
.IP \[bu] 2
LaTeX:
-\f[C]\[rs]includegraphics[width=0.5\[rs]textwidth,height=\[rs]textheight]{file.jpg}\f[R]
+\f[V]\[rs]includegraphics[width=0.5\[rs]textwidth,height=\[rs]textheight]{file.jpg}\f[R]
(If you\[cq]re using a custom template, you need to configure
-\f[C]graphicx\f[R] as in the default template.)
+\f[V]graphicx\f[R] as in the default template.)
.IP \[bu] 2
ConTeXt:
-\f[C]\[rs]externalfigure[file.jpg][width=0.5\[rs]textwidth]\f[R]
+\f[V]\[rs]externalfigure[file.jpg][width=0.5\[rs]textwidth]\f[R]
.RE
.IP \[bu] 2
Some output formats have a notion of a class (ConTeXt) or a unique
-identifier (LaTeX \f[C]\[rs]caption\f[R]), or both (HTML).
+identifier (LaTeX \f[V]\[rs]caption\f[R]), or both (HTML).
.IP \[bu] 2
-When no \f[C]width\f[R] or \f[C]height\f[R] attributes are specified,
+When no \f[V]width\f[R] or \f[V]height\f[R] attributes are specified,
the fallback is to look at the image resolution and the dpi metadata
embedded in the image file.
.SS Divs and Spans
.PP
-Using the \f[C]native_divs\f[R] and \f[C]native_spans\f[R] extensions
+Using the \f[V]native_divs\f[R] and \f[V]native_spans\f[R] extensions
(see above), HTML syntax can be used as part of markdown to create
-native \f[C]Div\f[R] and \f[C]Span\f[R] elements in the pandoc AST (as
+native \f[V]Div\f[R] and \f[V]Span\f[R] elements in the pandoc AST (as
opposed to raw HTML).
However, there is also nicer syntax available:
-.SS Extension: \f[C]fenced_divs\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]fenced_divs\f[R]
.PP
-Allow special fenced syntax for native \f[C]Div\f[R] blocks.
+Allow special fenced syntax for native \f[V]Div\f[R] blocks.
A Div starts with a fence containing at least three consecutive colons
plus some attributes.
The attributes may optionally be followed by another string of
consecutive colons.
The attribute syntax is exactly as in fenced code blocks (see Extension:
-\f[C]fenced_code_attributes\f[R]).
+\f[V]fenced_code_attributes\f[R]).
As with fenced code blocks, one can use either attributes in curly
braces or a single unbraced word, which will be treated as a class name.
The Div ends with another line containing a string of at least three
@@ -7010,10 +7437,10 @@ Unlike with fenced code blocks, the number of colons in the closing
fence need not match the number in the opening fence.
However, it can be helpful for visual clarity to use fences of different
lengths to distinguish nested divs from their parents.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]bracketed_spans\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]bracketed_spans\f[R]
.PP
A bracketed sequence of inlines, as one would use to begin a link, will
-be treated as a \f[C]Span\f[R] with attributes if it is followed
+be treated as a \f[V]Span\f[R] with attributes if it is followed
immediately by attributes:
.IP
.nf
@@ -7022,7 +7449,7 @@ immediately by attributes:
\f[R]
.fi
.SS Footnotes
-.SS Extension: \f[C]footnotes\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]footnotes\f[R]
.PP
Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown allows footnotes, using the following syntax:
.IP
@@ -7058,7 +7485,7 @@ They may appear anywhere except inside other block elements (lists,
block quotes, tables, etc.).
Each footnote should be separated from surrounding content (including
other footnotes) by blank lines.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]inline_notes\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]inline_notes\f[R]
.PP
Inline footnotes are also allowed (though, unlike regular notes, they
cannot contain multiple paragraphs).
@@ -7074,10 +7501,10 @@ note.]
.PP
Inline and regular footnotes may be mixed freely.
.SS Citation syntax
-.SS Extension: \f[C]citations\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]citations\f[R]
.PP
To cite a bibliographic item with an identifier foo, use the syntax
-\f[C]\[at]foo\f[R].
+\f[V]\[at]foo\f[R].
Normal citations should be included in square brackets, with semicolons
separating distinct items:
.IP
@@ -7111,19 +7538,19 @@ Susan Smith, \[dq]Bees,\[dq] *Journal of Insects* (2004).
See the CSL user documentation for more information about CSL styles and
how they affect rendering.
.PP
-Unless a citation key start with a letter, digit, or \f[C]_\f[R], and
+Unless a citation key start with a letter, digit, or \f[V]_\f[R], and
contains only alphanumerics and single internal punctuation characters
-(\f[C]:.#$%&-+?<>\[ti]/\f[R]), it must be surrounded by curly braces,
+(\f[V]:.#$%&-+?<>\[ti]/\f[R]), it must be surrounded by curly braces,
which are not considered part of the key.
-In \f[C]\[at]Foo_bar.baz.\f[R], the key is \f[C]Foo_bar.baz\f[R] because
+In \f[V]\[at]Foo_bar.baz.\f[R], the key is \f[V]Foo_bar.baz\f[R] because
the final period is not \f[I]internal\f[R] punctuation, so it is not
included in the key.
-In \f[C]\[at]{Foo_bar.baz.}\f[R], the key is \f[C]Foo_bar.baz.\f[R],
+In \f[V]\[at]{Foo_bar.baz.}\f[R], the key is \f[V]Foo_bar.baz.\f[R],
including the final period.
-In \f[C]\[at]Foo_bar--baz\f[R], the key is \f[C]Foo_bar\f[R] because the
+In \f[V]\[at]Foo_bar--baz\f[R], the key is \f[V]Foo_bar\f[R] because the
repeated internal punctuation characters terminate the key.
The curly braces are recommended if you use URLs as keys:
-\f[C][\[at]{https://example.com/bib?name=foobar&date=2000}, p. 33]\f[R].
+\f[V][\[at]{https://example.com/bib?name=foobar&date=2000}, p. 33]\f[R].
.PP
Citation items may optionally include a prefix, a locator, and a suffix.
In
@@ -7134,33 +7561,33 @@ Blah blah [see \[at]doe99, pp. 33-35 and *passim*; \[at]smith04, chap. 1].
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The first item (\f[C]doe99\f[R]) has prefix \f[C]see\f[R], locator
-\f[C]pp. 33-35\f[R], and suffix \f[C]and *passim*\f[R].
-The second item (\f[C]smith04\f[R]) has locator \f[C]chap. 1\f[R] and no
+The first item (\f[V]doe99\f[R]) has prefix \f[V]see\f[R], locator
+\f[V]pp. 33-35\f[R], and suffix \f[V]and *passim*\f[R].
+The second item (\f[V]smith04\f[R]) has locator \f[V]chap. 1\f[R] and no
prefix or suffix.
.PP
Pandoc uses some heuristics to separate the locator from the rest of the
subject.
It is sensitive to the locator terms defined in the CSL locale files.
Either abbreviated or unabbreviated forms are accepted.
-In the \f[C]en-US\f[R] locale, locator terms can be written in either
-singular or plural forms, as \f[C]book\f[R],
-\f[C]bk.\f[R]/\f[C]bks.\f[R]; \f[C]chapter\f[R],
-\f[C]chap.\f[R]/\f[C]chaps.\f[R]; \f[C]column\f[R],
-\f[C]col.\f[R]/\f[C]cols.\f[R]; \f[C]figure\f[R],
-\f[C]fig.\f[R]/\f[C]figs.\f[R]; \f[C]folio\f[R],
-\f[C]fol.\f[R]/\f[C]fols.\f[R]; \f[C]number\f[R],
-\f[C]no.\f[R]/\f[C]nos.\f[R]; \f[C]line\f[R],
-\f[C]l.\f[R]/\f[C]ll.\f[R]; \f[C]note\f[R], \f[C]n.\f[R]/\f[C]nn.\f[R];
-\f[C]opus\f[R], \f[C]op.\f[R]/\f[C]opp.\f[R]; \f[C]page\f[R],
-\f[C]p.\f[R]/\f[C]pp.\f[R]; \f[C]paragraph\f[R],
-\f[C]para.\f[R]/\f[C]paras.\f[R]; \f[C]part\f[R],
-\f[C]pt.\f[R]/\f[C]pts.\f[R]; \f[C]section\f[R],
-\f[C]sec.\f[R]/\f[C]secs.\f[R]; \f[C]sub verbo\f[R],
-\f[C]s.v.\f[R]/\f[C]s.vv.\f[R]; \f[C]verse\f[R],
-\f[C]v.\f[R]/\f[C]vv.\f[R]; \f[C]volume\f[R],
-\f[C]vol.\f[R]/\f[C]vols.\f[R]; \f[C]\[ps]\f[R]/\f[C]\[ps]\[ps]\f[R];
-\f[C]\[sc]\f[R]/\f[C]\[sc]\[sc]\f[R].
+In the \f[V]en-US\f[R] locale, locator terms can be written in either
+singular or plural forms, as \f[V]book\f[R],
+\f[V]bk.\f[R]/\f[V]bks.\f[R]; \f[V]chapter\f[R],
+\f[V]chap.\f[R]/\f[V]chaps.\f[R]; \f[V]column\f[R],
+\f[V]col.\f[R]/\f[V]cols.\f[R]; \f[V]figure\f[R],
+\f[V]fig.\f[R]/\f[V]figs.\f[R]; \f[V]folio\f[R],
+\f[V]fol.\f[R]/\f[V]fols.\f[R]; \f[V]number\f[R],
+\f[V]no.\f[R]/\f[V]nos.\f[R]; \f[V]line\f[R],
+\f[V]l.\f[R]/\f[V]ll.\f[R]; \f[V]note\f[R], \f[V]n.\f[R]/\f[V]nn.\f[R];
+\f[V]opus\f[R], \f[V]op.\f[R]/\f[V]opp.\f[R]; \f[V]page\f[R],
+\f[V]p.\f[R]/\f[V]pp.\f[R]; \f[V]paragraph\f[R],
+\f[V]para.\f[R]/\f[V]paras.\f[R]; \f[V]part\f[R],
+\f[V]pt.\f[R]/\f[V]pts.\f[R]; \f[V]section\f[R],
+\f[V]sec.\f[R]/\f[V]secs.\f[R]; \f[V]sub verbo\f[R],
+\f[V]s.v.\f[R]/\f[V]s.vv.\f[R]; \f[V]verse\f[R],
+\f[V]v.\f[R]/\f[V]vv.\f[R]; \f[V]volume\f[R],
+\f[V]vol.\f[R]/\f[V]vols.\f[R]; \f[V]\[ps]\f[R]/\f[V]\[ps]\[ps]\f[R];
+\f[V]\[sc]\f[R]/\f[V]\[sc]\[sc]\f[R].
If no locator term is used, \[lq]page\[rq] is assumed.
.PP
In complex cases, you can force something to be treated as a locator by
@@ -7175,7 +7602,7 @@ prepending curly braces:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-A minus sign (\f[C]-\f[R]) before the \f[C]\[at]\f[R] will suppress
+A minus sign (\f[V]-\f[R]) before the \f[V]\[at]\f[R] will suppress
mention of the author in the citation.
This can be useful when the author is already mentioned in the text:
.IP
@@ -7212,11 +7639,11 @@ style inside notes when using a note style.
.SS Non-default extensions
.PP
The following Markdown syntax extensions are not enabled by default in
-pandoc, but may be enabled by adding \f[C]+EXTENSION\f[R] to the format
-name, where \f[C]EXTENSION\f[R] is the name of the extension.
-Thus, for example, \f[C]markdown+hard_line_breaks\f[R] is Markdown with
+pandoc, but may be enabled by adding \f[V]+EXTENSION\f[R] to the format
+name, where \f[V]EXTENSION\f[R] is the name of the extension.
+Thus, for example, \f[V]markdown+hard_line_breaks\f[R] is Markdown with
hard line breaks.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]rebase_relative_paths\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]rebase_relative_paths\f[R]
.PP
Rewrite relative paths for Markdown links and images, depending on the
path of the file containing the link or image link.
@@ -7226,13 +7653,13 @@ resulting path to the link or image path.
.PP
The use of this extension is best understood by example.
Suppose you have a a subdirectory for each chapter of a book,
-\f[C]chap1\f[R], \f[C]chap2\f[R], \f[C]chap3\f[R].
-Each contains a file \f[C]text.md\f[R] and a number of images used in
+\f[V]chap1\f[R], \f[V]chap2\f[R], \f[V]chap3\f[R].
+Each contains a file \f[V]text.md\f[R] and a number of images used in
the chapter.
-You would like to have \f[C]\f[R] in
-\f[C]chap1/text.md\f[R] refer to \f[C]chap1/spider.jpg\f[R] and
-\f[C]\f[R] in \f[C]chap2/text.md\f[R] refer to
-\f[C]chap2/spider.jpg\f[R].
+You would like to have \f[V]\f[R] in
+\f[V]chap1/text.md\f[R] refer to \f[V]chap1/spider.jpg\f[R] and
+\f[V]\f[R] in \f[V]chap2/text.md\f[R] refer to
+\f[V]chap2/spider.jpg\f[R].
To do this, use
.IP
.nf
@@ -7242,29 +7669,29 @@ pandoc chap*/*.md -f markdown+rebase_relative_paths
.fi
.PP
Without this extension, you would have to use
-\f[C]\f[R] in \f[C]chap1/text.md\f[R] and
-\f[C]\f[R] in \f[C]chap2/text.md\f[R].
+\f[V]\f[R] in \f[V]chap1/text.md\f[R] and
+\f[V]\f[R] in \f[V]chap2/text.md\f[R].
Links with relative paths will be rewritten in the same way as images.
.PP
Absolute paths and URLs are not changed.
Neither are empty paths or paths consisting entirely of a fragment,
-e.g., \f[C]#foo\f[R].
+e.g., \f[V]#foo\f[R].
.PP
Note that relative paths in reference links and images will be rewritten
relative to the file containing the link reference definition, not the
file containing the reference link or image itself, if these differ.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]attributes\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]attributes\f[R]
.PP
Allows attributes to be attached to any inline or block-level element
-when parsing \f[C]commonmark\f[R].
+when parsing \f[V]commonmark\f[R].
The syntax for the attributes is the same as that used in
-\f[C]header_attributes\f[R].
+\f[V]header_attributes\f[R].
.IP \[bu] 2
Attributes that occur immediately after an inline element affect that
element.
If they follow a space, then they belong to the space.
-(Hence, this option subsumes \f[C]inline_code_attributes\f[R] and
-\f[C]link_attributes\f[R].)
+(Hence, this option subsumes \f[V]inline_code_attributes\f[R] and
+\f[V]link_attributes\f[R].)
.IP \[bu] 2
Attributes that occur immediately before a block element, on a line by
themselves, affect that element.
@@ -7275,11 +7702,11 @@ Their attributes will be combined.
.IP \[bu] 2
Attributes that occur at the end of the text of a Setext or ATX heading
(separated by whitespace from the text) affect the heading element.
-(Hence, this option subsumes \f[C]header_attributes\f[R].)
+(Hence, this option subsumes \f[V]header_attributes\f[R].)
.IP \[bu] 2
Attributes that occur after the opening fence in a fenced code block
affect the code block element.
-(Hence, this option subsumes \f[C]fenced_code_attributes\f[R].)
+(Hence, this option subsumes \f[V]fenced_code_attributes\f[R].)
.IP \[bu] 2
Attributes that occur at the end of a reference link definition affect
links that refer to that definition.
@@ -7287,27 +7714,27 @@ links that refer to that definition.
Note that pandoc\[cq]s AST does not currently allow attributes to be
attached to arbitrary elements.
Hence a Span or Div container will be added if needed.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]old_dashes\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]old_dashes\f[R]
.PP
Selects the pandoc <= 1.8.2.1 behavior for parsing smart dashes:
-\f[C]-\f[R] before a numeral is an en-dash, and \f[C]--\f[R] is an
+\f[V]-\f[R] before a numeral is an en-dash, and \f[V]--\f[R] is an
em-dash.
-This option only has an effect if \f[C]smart\f[R] is enabled.
-It is selected automatically for \f[C]textile\f[R] input.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]angle_brackets_escapable\f[R]
+This option only has an effect if \f[V]smart\f[R] is enabled.
+It is selected automatically for \f[V]textile\f[R] input.
+.SS Extension: \f[V]angle_brackets_escapable\f[R]
.PP
-Allow \f[C]<\f[R] and \f[C]>\f[R] to be backslash-escaped, as they can
+Allow \f[V]<\f[R] and \f[V]>\f[R] to be backslash-escaped, as they can
be in GitHub flavored Markdown but not original Markdown.
-This is implied by pandoc\[cq]s default \f[C]all_symbols_escapable\f[R].
-.SS Extension: \f[C]lists_without_preceding_blankline\f[R]
+This is implied by pandoc\[cq]s default \f[V]all_symbols_escapable\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[V]lists_without_preceding_blankline\f[R]
.PP
Allow a list to occur right after a paragraph, with no intervening blank
space.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]four_space_rule\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]four_space_rule\f[R]
.PP
Selects the pandoc <= 2.0 behavior for parsing lists, so that four
spaces indent are needed for list item continuation paragraphs.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]spaced_reference_links\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]spaced_reference_links\f[R]
.PP
Allow whitespace between the two components of a reference link, for
example,
@@ -7317,48 +7744,48 @@ example,
[foo] [bar].
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]hard_line_breaks\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]hard_line_breaks\f[R]
.PP
Causes all newlines within a paragraph to be interpreted as hard line
breaks instead of spaces.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]ignore_line_breaks\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]ignore_line_breaks\f[R]
.PP
Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
treated as spaces or as hard line breaks.
This option is intended for use with East Asian languages where spaces
are not used between words, but text is divided into lines for
readability.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]east_asian_line_breaks\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]east_asian_line_breaks\f[R]
.PP
Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
treated as spaces or as hard line breaks, when they occur between two
East Asian wide characters.
-This is a better choice than \f[C]ignore_line_breaks\f[R] for texts that
+This is a better choice than \f[V]ignore_line_breaks\f[R] for texts that
include a mix of East Asian wide characters and other characters.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]emoji\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]emoji\f[R]
.PP
-Parses textual emojis like \f[C]:smile:\f[R] as Unicode emoticons.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]tex_math_single_backslash\f[R]
+Parses textual emojis like \f[V]:smile:\f[R] as Unicode emoticons.
+.SS Extension: \f[V]tex_math_single_backslash\f[R]
.PP
-Causes anything between \f[C]\[rs](\f[R] and \f[C]\[rs])\f[R] to be
-interpreted as inline TeX math, and anything between \f[C]\[rs][\f[R]
-and \f[C]\[rs]]\f[R] to be interpreted as display TeX math.
+Causes anything between \f[V]\[rs](\f[R] and \f[V]\[rs])\f[R] to be
+interpreted as inline TeX math, and anything between \f[V]\[rs][\f[R]
+and \f[V]\[rs]]\f[R] to be interpreted as display TeX math.
Note: a drawback of this extension is that it precludes escaping
-\f[C](\f[R] and \f[C][\f[R].
-.SS Extension: \f[C]tex_math_double_backslash\f[R]
+\f[V](\f[R] and \f[V][\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[V]tex_math_double_backslash\f[R]
.PP
-Causes anything between \f[C]\[rs]\[rs](\f[R] and \f[C]\[rs]\[rs])\f[R]
+Causes anything between \f[V]\[rs]\[rs](\f[R] and \f[V]\[rs]\[rs])\f[R]
to be interpreted as inline TeX math, and anything between
-\f[C]\[rs]\[rs][\f[R] and \f[C]\[rs]\[rs]]\f[R] to be interpreted as
+\f[V]\[rs]\[rs][\f[R] and \f[V]\[rs]\[rs]]\f[R] to be interpreted as
display TeX math.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]markdown_attribute\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]markdown_attribute\f[R]
.PP
By default, pandoc interprets material inside block-level tags as
Markdown.
This extension changes the behavior so that Markdown is only parsed
inside block-level tags if the tags have the attribute
-\f[C]markdown=1\f[R].
-.SS Extension: \f[C]mmd_title_block\f[R]
+\f[V]markdown=1\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[V]mmd_title_block\f[R]
.PP
Enables a MultiMarkdown style title block at the top of the document,
for example:
@@ -7374,9 +7801,9 @@ Comment: This is a sample mmd title block, with
.fi
.PP
See the MultiMarkdown documentation for details.
-If \f[C]pandoc_title_block\f[R] or \f[C]yaml_metadata_block\f[R] is
-enabled, it will take precedence over \f[C]mmd_title_block\f[R].
-.SS Extension: \f[C]abbreviations\f[R]
+If \f[V]pandoc_title_block\f[R] or \f[V]yaml_metadata_block\f[R] is
+enabled, it will take precedence over \f[V]mmd_title_block\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[V]abbreviations\f[R]
.PP
Parses PHP Markdown Extra abbreviation keys, like
.IP
@@ -7389,15 +7816,15 @@ Parses PHP Markdown Extra abbreviation keys, like
Note that the pandoc document model does not support abbreviations, so
if this extension is enabled, abbreviation keys are simply skipped (as
opposed to being parsed as paragraphs).
-.SS Extension: \f[C]autolink_bare_uris\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]autolink_bare_uris\f[R]
.PP
Makes all absolute URIs into links, even when not surrounded by pointy
-braces \f[C]<...>\f[R].
-.SS Extension: \f[C]mmd_link_attributes\f[R]
+braces \f[V]<...>\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[V]mmd_link_attributes\f[R]
.PP
Parses multimarkdown style key-value attributes on link and image
references.
-This extension should not be confused with the \f[C]link_attributes\f[R]
+This extension should not be confused with the \f[V]link_attributes\f[R]
extension.
.IP
.nf
@@ -7408,12 +7835,12 @@ This is a reference ![image][ref] with multimarkdown attributes.
id=myId class=\[dq]myClass1 myClass2\[dq]
\f[R]
.fi
-.SS Extension: \f[C]mmd_header_identifiers\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]mmd_header_identifiers\f[R]
.PP
Parses multimarkdown style heading identifiers (in square brackets,
-after the heading but before any trailing \f[C]#\f[R]s in an ATX
+after the heading but before any trailing \f[V]#\f[R]s in an ATX
heading).
-.SS Extension: \f[C]compact_definition_lists\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]compact_definition_lists\f[R]
.PP
Activates the definition list syntax of pandoc 1.12.x and earlier.
This syntax differs from the one described above under Definition lists
@@ -7428,18 +7855,18 @@ affect anything.
.IP \[bu] 2
Lazy wrapping of paragraphs is not allowed: the entire definition must
be indented four spaces.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]gutenberg\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]gutenberg\f[R]
.PP
-Use Project Gutenberg conventions for \f[C]plain\f[R] output: all-caps
+Use Project Gutenberg conventions for \f[V]plain\f[R] output: all-caps
for strong emphasis, surround by underscores for regular emphasis, add
extra blank space around headings.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]sourcepos\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[V]sourcepos\f[R]
.PP
-Include source position attributes when parsing \f[C]commonmark\f[R].
-For elements that accept attributes, a \f[C]data-pos\f[R] attribute is
+Include source position attributes when parsing \f[V]commonmark\f[R].
+For elements that accept attributes, a \f[V]data-pos\f[R] attribute is
added; other elements are placed in a surrounding Div or Span element
-with a \f[C]data-pos\f[R] attribute.
-.SS Extension: \f[C]short_subsuperscripts\f[R]
+with a \f[V]data-pos\f[R] attribute.
+.SS Extension: \f[V]short_subsuperscripts\f[R]
.PP
Parse multimarkdown style subscripts and superscripts, which start with
a `\[ti]' or `\[ha]' character, respectively, and include the
@@ -7464,19 +7891,19 @@ Oxygen is O\[ti]2.
In addition to pandoc\[cq]s extended Markdown, the following Markdown
variants are supported:
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_phpextra\f[R] (PHP Markdown Extra)
+\f[V]markdown_phpextra\f[R] (PHP Markdown Extra)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_github\f[R] (deprecated GitHub-Flavored Markdown)
+\f[V]markdown_github\f[R] (deprecated GitHub-Flavored Markdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_mmd\f[R] (MultiMarkdown)
+\f[V]markdown_mmd\f[R] (MultiMarkdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]markdown_strict\f[R] (Markdown.pl)
+\f[V]markdown_strict\f[R] (Markdown.pl)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]commonmark\f[R] (CommonMark)
+\f[V]commonmark\f[R] (CommonMark)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]gfm\f[R] (Github-Flavored Markdown)
+\f[V]gfm\f[R] (Github-Flavored Markdown)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]commonmark_x\f[R] (CommonMark with many pandoc extensions)
+\f[V]commonmark_x\f[R] (CommonMark with many pandoc extensions)
.PP
To see which extensions are supported for a given format, and which are
enabled by default, you can use the command
@@ -7487,16 +7914,16 @@ pandoc --list-extensions=FORMAT
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-where \f[C]FORMAT\f[R] is replaced with the name of the format.
+where \f[V]FORMAT\f[R] is replaced with the name of the format.
.PP
-Note that the list of extensions for \f[C]commonmark\f[R],
-\f[C]gfm\f[R], and \f[C]commonmark_x\f[R] are defined relative to
+Note that the list of extensions for \f[V]commonmark\f[R],
+\f[V]gfm\f[R], and \f[V]commonmark_x\f[R] are defined relative to
default commonmark.
-So, for example, \f[C]backtick_code_blocks\f[R] does not appear as an
+So, for example, \f[V]backtick_code_blocks\f[R] does not appear as an
extension, since it is enabled by default and cannot be disabled.
.SH CITATIONS
.PP
-When the \f[C]--citeproc\f[R] option is used, pandoc can automatically
+When the \f[V]--citeproc\f[R] option is used, pandoc can automatically
generate citations and a bibliography in a number of styles.
Basic usage is
.IP
@@ -7508,19 +7935,19 @@ pandoc --citeproc myinput.txt
.PP
To use this feature, you will need to have
.IP \[bu] 2
-a document containing citations (see Extension: \f[C]citations\f[R]);
+a document containing citations (see Extension: \f[V]citations\f[R]);
.IP \[bu] 2
a source of bibliographic data: either an external bibliography file or
-a list of \f[C]references\f[R] in the document\[cq]s YAML metadata
+a list of \f[V]references\f[R] in the document\[cq]s YAML metadata
.IP \[bu] 2
optionally, a CSL citation style.
.SS Specifying bibliographic data
.PP
You can specify an external bibliography using the
-\f[C]bibliography\f[R] metadata field in a YAML metadata section or the
-\f[C]--bibliography\f[R] command line argument.
+\f[V]bibliography\f[R] metadata field in a YAML metadata section or the
+\f[V]--bibliography\f[R] command line argument.
If you want to use multiple bibliography files, you can supply multiple
-\f[C]--bibliography\f[R] arguments or set \f[C]bibliography\f[R]
+\f[V]--bibliography\f[R] arguments or set \f[V]bibliography\f[R]
metadata field to YAML array.
A bibliography may have any of these formats:
.PP
@@ -7555,36 +7982,36 @@ T}@T{
T}
.TE
.PP
-Note that \f[C].bib\f[R] can be used with both BibTeX and BibLaTeX
-files; use the extension \f[C].bibtex\f[R] to force interpretation as
+Note that \f[V].bib\f[R] can be used with both BibTeX and BibLaTeX
+files; use the extension \f[V].bibtex\f[R] to force interpretation as
BibTeX.
.PP
In BibTeX and BibLaTeX databases, pandoc parses LaTeX markup inside
-fields such as \f[C]title\f[R]; in CSL YAML databases, pandoc Markdown;
+fields such as \f[V]title\f[R]; in CSL YAML databases, pandoc Markdown;
and in CSL JSON databases, an HTML-like markup:
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]<i>...</i>\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]<i>...</i>\f[R]
italics
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]<b>...</b>\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]<b>...</b>\f[R]
bold
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]<span style=\[dq]font-variant:small-caps;\[dq]>...</span>\f[B]\f[R] or \f[B]\f[CB]<sc>...</sc>\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]<span style=\[dq]font-variant:small-caps;\[dq]>...</span>\f[R] or \f[V]<sc>...</sc>\f[R]
small capitals
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]<sub>...</sub>\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]<sub>...</sub>\f[R]
subscript
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]<sup>...</sup>\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]<sup>...</sup>\f[R]
superscript
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]<span class=\[dq]nocase\[dq]>...</span>\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]<span class=\[dq]nocase\[dq]>...</span>\f[R]
prevent a phrase from being capitalized as title case
.PP
As an alternative to specifying a bibliography file using
-\f[C]--bibliography\f[R] or the YAML metadata field
-\f[C]bibliography\f[R], you can include the citation data directly in
-the \f[C]references\f[R] field of the document\[cq]s YAML metadata.
+\f[V]--bibliography\f[R] or the YAML metadata field
+\f[V]bibliography\f[R], you can include the citation data directly in
+the \f[V]references\f[R] field of the document\[cq]s YAML metadata.
The field should contain an array of YAML-encoded references, for
example:
.IP
@@ -7620,7 +8047,7 @@ references:
.PP
If both an external bibliography and inline (YAML metadata) references
are provided, both will be used.
-In case of conflicting \f[C]id\f[R]s, the inline references will take
+In case of conflicting \f[V]id\f[R]s, the inline references will take
precedence.
.PP
Note that pandoc can be used to produce such a YAML metadata section
@@ -7642,7 +8069,7 @@ pandoc chem.yaml -s -f markdown -t biblatex
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Running pandoc on a bibliography file with the \f[C]--citeproc\f[R]
+Running pandoc on a bibliography file with the \f[V]--citeproc\f[R]
option will create a formatted bibliography in the format of your
choice:
.IP
@@ -7658,12 +8085,12 @@ If you are using a bibtex or biblatex bibliography, then observe the
following rules:
.IP \[bu] 2
English titles should be in title case.
-Non-English titles should be in sentence case, and the \f[C]langid\f[R]
+Non-English titles should be in sentence case, and the \f[V]langid\f[R]
field in biblatex should be set to the relevant language.
-(The following values are treated as English: \f[C]american\f[R],
-\f[C]british\f[R], \f[C]canadian\f[R], \f[C]english\f[R],
-\f[C]australian\f[R], \f[C]newzealand\f[R], \f[C]USenglish\f[R], or
-\f[C]UKenglish\f[R].)
+(The following values are treated as English: \f[V]american\f[R],
+\f[V]british\f[R], \f[V]canadian\f[R], \f[V]english\f[R],
+\f[V]australian\f[R], \f[V]newzealand\f[R], \f[V]USenglish\f[R], or
+\f[V]UKenglish\f[R].)
.IP \[bu] 2
As is standard with bibtex/biblatex, proper names should be protected
with curly braces so that they won\[cq]t be lowercased in styles that
@@ -7700,9 +8127,9 @@ the following rules:
.IP \[bu] 2
All titles should be in sentence case.
.IP \[bu] 2
-Use the \f[C]language\f[R] field for non-English titles to prevent their
+Use the \f[V]language\f[R] field for non-English titles to prevent their
conversion to title case in styles that call for this.
-(Conversion happens only if \f[C]language\f[R] begins with \f[C]en\f[R]
+(Conversion happens only if \f[V]language\f[R] begins with \f[V]en\f[R]
or is left empty.)
.IP \[bu] 2
Protect words that should not be converted to title case using this
@@ -7718,41 +8145,41 @@ Spin wave dispersion on the <span class=\[dq]nocase\[dq]>nm</span> scale
.SS Conference Papers, Published vs.\ Unpublished
.PP
For a formally published conference paper, use the biblatex entry type
-\f[C]inproceedings\f[R] (which will be mapped to CSL
-\f[C]paper-conference\f[R]).
+\f[V]inproceedings\f[R] (which will be mapped to CSL
+\f[V]paper-conference\f[R]).
.PP
For an unpublished manuscript, use the biblatex entry type
-\f[C]unpublished\f[R] without an \f[C]eventtitle\f[R] field (this entry
-type will be mapped to CSL \f[C]manuscript\f[R]).
+\f[V]unpublished\f[R] without an \f[V]eventtitle\f[R] field (this entry
+type will be mapped to CSL \f[V]manuscript\f[R]).
.PP
For a talk, an unpublished conference paper, or a poster presentation,
-use the biblatex entry type \f[C]unpublished\f[R] with an
-\f[C]eventtitle\f[R] field (this entry type will be mapped to CSL
-\f[C]speech\f[R]).
-Use the biblatex \f[C]type\f[R] field to indicate the type,
+use the biblatex entry type \f[V]unpublished\f[R] with an
+\f[V]eventtitle\f[R] field (this entry type will be mapped to CSL
+\f[V]speech\f[R]).
+Use the biblatex \f[V]type\f[R] field to indicate the type,
e.g.\ \[lq]Paper\[rq], or \[lq]Poster\[rq].
-\f[C]venue\f[R] and \f[C]eventdate\f[R] may be useful too, though
-\f[C]eventdate\f[R] will not be rendered by most CSL styles.
-Note that \f[C]venue\f[R] is for the event\[cq]s venue, unlike
-\f[C]location\f[R] which describes the publisher\[cq]s location; do not
+\f[V]venue\f[R] and \f[V]eventdate\f[R] may be useful too, though
+\f[V]eventdate\f[R] will not be rendered by most CSL styles.
+Note that \f[V]venue\f[R] is for the event\[cq]s venue, unlike
+\f[V]location\f[R] which describes the publisher\[cq]s location; do not
use the latter for an unpublished conference paper.
.SS Specifying a citation style
.PP
Citations and references can be formatted using any style supported by
the Citation Style Language, listed in the Zotero Style Repository.
-These files are specified using the \f[C]--csl\f[R] option or the
-\f[C]csl\f[R] (or \f[C]citation-style\f[R]) metadata field.
+These files are specified using the \f[V]--csl\f[R] option or the
+\f[V]csl\f[R] (or \f[V]citation-style\f[R]) metadata field.
By default, pandoc will use the Chicago Manual of Style author-date
format.
(You can override this default by copying a CSL style of your choice to
-\f[C]default.csl\f[R] in your user data directory.)
+\f[V]default.csl\f[R] in your user data directory.)
The CSL project provides further information on finding and editing
styles.
.PP
-The \f[C]--citation-abbreviations\f[R] option (or the
-\f[C]citation-abbreviations\f[R] metadata field) may be used to specify
+The \f[V]--citation-abbreviations\f[R] option (or the
+\f[V]citation-abbreviations\f[R] metadata field) may be used to specify
a JSON file containing abbreviations of journals that should be used in
-formatted bibliographies when \f[C]form=\[dq]short\[dq]\f[R] is
+formatted bibliographies when \f[V]form=\[dq]short\[dq]\f[R] is
specified.
The format of the file can be illustrated with an example:
.IP
@@ -7786,13 +8213,13 @@ Blah blah [\[at]foo, p. 33].
The footnote will be created automatically.
Pandoc will take care of removing the space and moving the note before
or after the period, depending on the setting of
-\f[C]notes-after-punctuation\f[R], as described below in Other relevant
+\f[V]notes-after-punctuation\f[R], as described below in Other relevant
metadata fields.
.PP
In some cases you may need to put a citation inside a regular footnote.
-Normal citations in footnotes (such as \f[C][\[at]foo, p. 33]\f[R]) will
+Normal citations in footnotes (such as \f[V][\[at]foo, p. 33]\f[R]) will
be rendered in parentheses.
-In-text citations (such as \f[C]\[at]foo [p. 33]\f[R]) will be rendered
+In-text citations (such as \f[V]\[at]foo [p. 33]\f[R]) will be rendered
without parentheses.
(A comma will be added if appropriate.)
Thus:
@@ -7825,7 +8252,7 @@ CSL implementations.
.SS Placement of the bibliography
.PP
If the style calls for a list of works cited, it will be placed in a div
-with id \f[C]refs\f[R], if one exists:
+with id \f[V]refs\f[R], if one exists:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -7836,11 +8263,11 @@ with id \f[C]refs\f[R], if one exists:
.PP
Otherwise, it will be placed at the end of the document.
Generation of the bibliography can be suppressed by setting
-\f[C]suppress-bibliography: true\f[R] in the YAML metadata.
+\f[V]suppress-bibliography: true\f[R] in the YAML metadata.
.PP
If you wish the bibliography to have a section heading, you can set
-\f[C]reference-section-title\f[R] in the metadata, or put the heading at
-the beginning of the div with id \f[C]refs\f[R] (if you are using it) or
+\f[V]reference-section-title\f[R] in the metadata, or put the heading at
+the beginning of the div with id \f[V]refs\f[R] (if you are using it) or
at the end of your document:
.IP
.nf
@@ -7852,12 +8279,12 @@ last paragraph...
.fi
.PP
The bibliography will be inserted after this heading.
-Note that the \f[C]unnumbered\f[R] class will be added to this heading,
+Note that the \f[V]unnumbered\f[R] class will be added to this heading,
so that the section will not be numbered.
.SS Including uncited items in the bibliography
.PP
If you want to include items in the bibliography without actually citing
-them in the body text, you can define a dummy \f[C]nocite\f[R] metadata
+them in the body text, you can define a dummy \f[V]nocite\f[R] metadata
field and put the citations there:
.IP
.nf
@@ -7872,8 +8299,8 @@ nocite: |
.fi
.PP
In this example, the document will contain a citation for
-\f[C]item3\f[R] only, but the bibliography will contain entries for
-\f[C]item1\f[R], \f[C]item2\f[R], and \f[C]item3\f[R].
+\f[V]item3\f[R] only, but the bibliography will contain entries for
+\f[V]item1\f[R], \f[V]item2\f[R], and \f[V]item3\f[R].
.PP
It is possible to create a bibliography with all the citations, whether
or not they appear in the document, by using a wildcard:
@@ -7887,23 +8314,23 @@ nocite: |
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-For LaTeX output, you can also use \f[C]natbib\f[R] or
-\f[C]biblatex\f[R] to render the bibliography.
+For LaTeX output, you can also use \f[V]natbib\f[R] or
+\f[V]biblatex\f[R] to render the bibliography.
In order to do so, specify bibliography files as outlined above, and add
-\f[C]--natbib\f[R] or \f[C]--biblatex\f[R] argument to pandoc
+\f[V]--natbib\f[R] or \f[V]--biblatex\f[R] argument to pandoc
invocation.
Bear in mind that bibliography files have to be in either BibTeX (for
-\f[C]--natbib\f[R]) or BibLaTeX (for \f[C]--biblatex\f[R]) format.
+\f[V]--natbib\f[R]) or BibLaTeX (for \f[V]--biblatex\f[R]) format.
.SS Other relevant metadata fields
.PP
A few other metadata fields affect bibliography formatting:
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]link-citations\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]link-citations\f[R]
If true, citations will be hyperlinked to the corresponding bibliography
entries (for author-date and numerical styles only).
Defaults to false.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]link-bibliography\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]link-bibliography\f[R]
If true, DOIs, PMCIDs, PMID, and URLs in bibliographies will be rendered
as hyperlinks.
(If an entry contains a DOI, PMCID, PMID, or URL, but none of these
@@ -7911,38 +8338,38 @@ fields are rendered by the style, then the title, or in the absence of a
title the whole entry, will be hyperlinked.)
Defaults to true.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]lang\f[B]\f[R]
-The \f[C]lang\f[R] field will affect how the style is localized, for
+\f[V]lang\f[R]
+The \f[V]lang\f[R] field will affect how the style is localized, for
example in the translation of labels, the use of quotation marks, and
the way items are sorted.
-(For backwards compatibility, \f[C]locale\f[R] may be used instead of
-\f[C]lang\f[R], but this use is deprecated.)
+(For backwards compatibility, \f[V]locale\f[R] may be used instead of
+\f[V]lang\f[R], but this use is deprecated.)
.RS
.PP
-A BCP 47 language tag is expected: for example, \f[C]en\f[R],
-\f[C]de\f[R], \f[C]en-US\f[R], \f[C]fr-CA\f[R], \f[C]ug-Cyrl\f[R].
-The unicode extension syntax (after \f[C]-u-\f[R]) may be used to
+A BCP 47 language tag is expected: for example, \f[V]en\f[R],
+\f[V]de\f[R], \f[V]en-US\f[R], \f[V]fr-CA\f[R], \f[V]ug-Cyrl\f[R].
+The unicode extension syntax (after \f[V]-u-\f[R]) may be used to
specify options for collation (sorting) more precisely.
Here are some examples:
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]zh-u-co-pinyin\f[R] \[en] Chinese with the Pinyin collation.
+\f[V]zh-u-co-pinyin\f[R] \[en] Chinese with the Pinyin collation.
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]es-u-co-trad\f[R] \[en] Spanish with the traditional collation
-(with \f[C]Ch\f[R] sorting after \f[C]C\f[R]).
+\f[V]es-u-co-trad\f[R] \[en] Spanish with the traditional collation
+(with \f[V]Ch\f[R] sorting after \f[V]C\f[R]).
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]fr-u-kb\f[R] \[en] French with \[lq]backwards\[rq] accent sorting
-(with \f[C]cot\['e]\f[R] sorting after \f[C]c\[^o]te\f[R]).
+\f[V]fr-u-kb\f[R] \[en] French with \[lq]backwards\[rq] accent sorting
+(with \f[V]cot\['e]\f[R] sorting after \f[V]c\[^o]te\f[R]).
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]en-US-u-kf-upper\f[R] \[en] English with uppercase letters sorting
+\f[V]en-US-u-kf-upper\f[R] \[en] English with uppercase letters sorting
before lower (default is lower before upper).
.RE
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]notes-after-punctuation\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]notes-after-punctuation\f[R]
If true (the default for note styles), pandoc will put footnote
references or superscripted numerical citations after following
punctuation.
-For example, if the source contains \f[C]blah blah [\[at]jones99].\f[R],
-the result will look like \f[C]blah blah.[\[ha]1]\f[R], with the note
+For example, if the source contains \f[V]blah blah [\[at]jones99].\f[R],
+the result will look like \f[V]blah blah.[\[ha]1]\f[R], with the note
moved after the period and the space collapsed.
If false, the space will still be collapsed, but the footnote will not
be moved after the punctuation.
@@ -7955,11 +8382,11 @@ You can use pandoc to produce an HTML + JavaScript slide presentation
that can be viewed via a web browser.
There are five ways to do this, using S5, DZSlides, Slidy, Slideous, or
reveal.js.
-You can also produce a PDF slide show using LaTeX \f[C]beamer\f[R], or
+You can also produce a PDF slide show using LaTeX \f[V]beamer\f[R], or
slides shows in Microsoft PowerPoint format.
.PP
Here\[cq]s the Markdown source for a simple slide show,
-\f[C]habits.txt\f[R]:
+\f[V]habits.txt\f[R]:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8005,22 +8432,22 @@ pandoc -t FORMAT -s habits.txt -o habits.html
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-where \f[C]FORMAT\f[R] is either \f[C]s5\f[R], \f[C]slidy\f[R],
-\f[C]slideous\f[R], \f[C]dzslides\f[R], or \f[C]revealjs\f[R].
+where \f[V]FORMAT\f[R] is either \f[V]s5\f[R], \f[V]slidy\f[R],
+\f[V]slideous\f[R], \f[V]dzslides\f[R], or \f[V]revealjs\f[R].
.PP
For Slidy, Slideous, reveal.js, and S5, the file produced by pandoc with
-the \f[C]-s/--standalone\f[R] option embeds a link to JavaScript and CSS
+the \f[V]-s/--standalone\f[R] option embeds a link to JavaScript and CSS
files, which are assumed to be available at the relative path
-\f[C]s5/default\f[R] (for S5), \f[C]slideous\f[R] (for Slideous),
-\f[C]reveal.js\f[R] (for reveal.js), or at the Slidy website at
-\f[C]w3.org\f[R] (for Slidy).
-(These paths can be changed by setting the \f[C]slidy-url\f[R],
-\f[C]slideous-url\f[R], \f[C]revealjs-url\f[R], or \f[C]s5-url\f[R]
+\f[V]s5/default\f[R] (for S5), \f[V]slideous\f[R] (for Slideous),
+\f[V]reveal.js\f[R] (for reveal.js), or at the Slidy website at
+\f[V]w3.org\f[R] (for Slidy).
+(These paths can be changed by setting the \f[V]slidy-url\f[R],
+\f[V]slideous-url\f[R], \f[V]revealjs-url\f[R], or \f[V]s5-url\f[R]
variables; see Variables for HTML slides, above.)
For DZSlides, the (relatively short) JavaScript and CSS are included in
the file by default.
.PP
-With all HTML slide formats, the \f[C]--self-contained\f[R] option can
+With all HTML slide formats, the \f[V]--self-contained\f[R] option can
be used to produce a single file that contains all of the data necessary
to display the slide show, including linked scripts, stylesheets,
images, and videos.
@@ -8050,7 +8477,7 @@ the hierarchy that is followed immediately by content, and not another
heading, somewhere in the document.
In the example above, level-1 headings are always followed by level-2
headings, which are followed by content, so the slide level is 2.
-This default can be overridden using the \f[C]--slide-level\f[R] option.
+This default can be overridden using the \f[V]--slide-level\f[R] option.
.PP
The document is carved up into slides according to the following rules:
.IP \[bu] 2
@@ -8061,10 +8488,10 @@ A heading at the slide level always starts a new slide.
Headings \f[I]below\f[R] the slide level in the hierarchy create
headings \f[I]within\f[R] a slide.
(In beamer, a \[lq]block\[rq] will be created.
-If the heading has the class \f[C]example\f[R], an
-\f[C]exampleblock\f[R] environment will be used; if it has the class
-\f[C]alert\f[R], an \f[C]alertblock\f[R] will be used; otherwise a
-regular \f[C]block\f[R] will be used.)
+If the heading has the class \f[V]example\f[R], an
+\f[V]exampleblock\f[R] environment will be used; if it has the class
+\f[V]alert\f[R], an \f[V]alertblock\f[R] will be used; otherwise a
+regular \f[V]block\f[R] will be used.)
.IP \[bu] 2
Headings \f[I]above\f[R] the slide level in the hierarchy create
\[lq]title slides,\[rq] which just contain the section title and help to
@@ -8082,13 +8509,13 @@ These rules are designed to support many different styles of slide show.
If you don\[cq]t care about structuring your slides into sections and
subsections, you can either just use level-1 headings for all slides (in
that case, level 1 will be the slide level) or you can set
-\f[C]--slide-level=0\f[R].
+\f[V]--slide-level=0\f[R].
.PP
Note: in reveal.js slide shows, if slide level is 2, a two-dimensional
layout will be produced, with level-1 headings building horizontally and
level-2 headings building vertically.
It is not recommended that you use deeper nesting of section levels with
-reveal.js unless you set \f[C]--slide-level=0\f[R] (which lets reveal.js
+reveal.js unless you set \f[V]--slide-level=0\f[R] (which lets reveal.js
produce a one-dimensional layout and only interprets horizontal rules as
slide boundaries).
.SS PowerPoint layout choice
@@ -8098,8 +8525,8 @@ pre-defined layouts, based on the content of the slide:
.TP
Title Slide
This layout is used for the initial slide, which is generated and filled
-from the metadata fields \f[C]date\f[R], \f[C]author\f[R], and
-\f[C]title\f[R], if they are present.
+from the metadata fields \f[V]date\f[R], \f[V]author\f[R], and
+\f[V]title\f[R], if they are present.
.TP
Section Header
This layout is used for what pandoc calls \[lq]title slides\[rq], i.e.
@@ -8108,8 +8535,8 @@ hierarchy.
.TP
Two Content
This layout is used for two-column slides, i.e.\ slides containing a div
-with class \f[C]columns\f[R] which contains at least two divs with class
-\f[C]column\f[R].
+with class \f[V]columns\f[R] which contains at least two divs with class
+\f[V]column\f[R].
.TP
Comparison
This layout is used instead of \[lq]Two Content\[rq] for any two-column
@@ -8131,16 +8558,16 @@ another layout.
.PP
These layouts are chosen from the default pptx reference doc included
with pandoc, unless an alternative reference doc is specified using
-\f[C]--reference-doc\f[R].
+\f[V]--reference-doc\f[R].
.SS Incremental lists
.PP
By default, these writers produce lists that display \[lq]all at
once.\[rq] If you want your lists to display incrementally (one item at
-a time), use the \f[C]-i\f[R] option.
+a time), use the \f[V]-i\f[R] option.
If you want a particular list to depart from the default, put it in a
-\f[C]div\f[R] block with class \f[C]incremental\f[R] or
-\f[C]nonincremental\f[R].
-So, for example, using the \f[C]fenced div\f[R] syntax, the following
+\f[V]div\f[R] block with class \f[V]incremental\f[R] or
+\f[V]nonincremental\f[R].
+So, for example, using the \f[V]fenced div\f[R] syntax, the following
would be incremental regardless of the document default:
.IP
.nf
@@ -8167,12 +8594,12 @@ or
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-While using \f[C]incremental\f[R] and \f[C]nonincremental\f[R] divs are
+While using \f[V]incremental\f[R] and \f[V]nonincremental\f[R] divs are
the recommended method of setting incremental lists on a per-case basis,
an older method is also supported: putting lists inside a blockquote
will depart from the document default (that is, it will display
-incrementally without the \f[C]-i\f[R] option and all at once with the
-\f[C]-i\f[R] option):
+incrementally without the \f[V]-i\f[R] option and all at once with the
+\f[V]-i\f[R] option):
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8204,12 +8631,12 @@ Note: this feature is not yet implemented for PowerPoint output.
.SS Styling the slides
.PP
You can change the style of HTML slides by putting customized CSS files
-in \f[C]$DATADIR/s5/default\f[R] (for S5), \f[C]$DATADIR/slidy\f[R] (for
-Slidy), or \f[C]$DATADIR/slideous\f[R] (for Slideous), where
-\f[C]$DATADIR\f[R] is the user data directory (see \f[C]--data-dir\f[R],
+in \f[V]$DATADIR/s5/default\f[R] (for S5), \f[V]$DATADIR/slidy\f[R] (for
+Slidy), or \f[V]$DATADIR/slideous\f[R] (for Slideous), where
+\f[V]$DATADIR\f[R] is the user data directory (see \f[V]--data-dir\f[R],
above).
The originals may be found in pandoc\[cq]s system data directory
-(generally \f[C]$CABALDIR/pandoc-VERSION/s5/default\f[R]).
+(generally \f[V]$CABALDIR/pandoc-VERSION/s5/default\f[R]).
Pandoc will look there for any files it does not find in the user data
directory.
.PP
@@ -8217,7 +8644,7 @@ For dzslides, the CSS is included in the HTML file itself, and may be
modified there.
.PP
All reveal.js configuration options can be set through variables.
-For example, themes can be used by setting the \f[C]theme\f[R] variable:
+For example, themes can be used by setting the \f[V]theme\f[R] variable:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8225,11 +8652,11 @@ For example, themes can be used by setting the \f[C]theme\f[R] variable:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Or you can specify a custom stylesheet using the \f[C]--css\f[R] option.
+Or you can specify a custom stylesheet using the \f[V]--css\f[R] option.
.PP
-To style beamer slides, you can specify a \f[C]theme\f[R],
-\f[C]colortheme\f[R], \f[C]fonttheme\f[R], \f[C]innertheme\f[R], and
-\f[C]outertheme\f[R], using the \f[C]-V\f[R] option:
+To style beamer slides, you can specify a \f[V]theme\f[R],
+\f[V]colortheme\f[R], \f[V]fonttheme\f[R], \f[V]innertheme\f[R], and
+\f[V]outertheme\f[R], using the \f[V]-V\f[R] option:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8238,7 +8665,7 @@ pandoc -t beamer habits.txt -V theme:Warsaw -o habits.pdf
.fi
.PP
Note that heading attributes will turn into slide attributes (on a
-\f[C]<div>\f[R] or \f[C]<section>\f[R]) in HTML slide formats, allowing
+\f[V]<div>\f[R] or \f[V]<section>\f[R]) in HTML slide formats, allowing
you to style individual slides.
In beamer, a number of heading classes and attributes are recognized as
frame options and will be passed through as options to the frame: see
@@ -8262,7 +8689,7 @@ This is my note.
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-To show the notes window in reveal.js, press \f[C]s\f[R] while viewing
+To show the notes window in reveal.js, press \f[V]s\f[R] while viewing
the presentation.
Speaker notes in PowerPoint will be available, as usual, in handouts and
presenter view.
@@ -8272,8 +8699,8 @@ not appear on the slides themselves.
.SS Columns
.PP
To put material in side by side columns, you can use a native div
-container with class \f[C]columns\f[R], containing two or more div
-containers with class \f[C]column\f[R] and a \f[C]width\f[R] attribute:
+container with class \f[V]columns\f[R], containing two or more div
+containers with class \f[V]column\f[R] and a \f[V]width\f[R] attribute:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8289,10 +8716,10 @@ contents...
.fi
.SS Additional columns attributes in beamer
.PP
-The div containers with classes \f[C]columns\f[R] and \f[C]column\f[R]
-can optionally have an \f[C]align\f[R] attribute.
-The class \f[C]columns\f[R] can optionally have a \f[C]totalwidth\f[R]
-attribute or an \f[C]onlytextwidth\f[R] class.
+The div containers with classes \f[V]columns\f[R] and \f[V]column\f[R]
+can optionally have an \f[V]align\f[R] attribute.
+The class \f[V]columns\f[R] can optionally have a \f[V]totalwidth\f[R]
+attribute or an \f[V]onlytextwidth\f[R] class.
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8307,12 +8734,12 @@ contents...
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The \f[C]align\f[R] attributes on \f[C]columns\f[R] and \f[C]column\f[R]
-can be used with the values \f[C]top\f[R], \f[C]top-baseline\f[R],
-\f[C]center\f[R] and \f[C]bottom\f[R] to vertically align the columns.
-It defaults to \f[C]top\f[R] in \f[C]columns\f[R].
+The \f[V]align\f[R] attributes on \f[V]columns\f[R] and \f[V]column\f[R]
+can be used with the values \f[V]top\f[R], \f[V]top-baseline\f[R],
+\f[V]center\f[R] and \f[V]bottom\f[R] to vertically align the columns.
+It defaults to \f[V]top\f[R] in \f[V]columns\f[R].
.PP
-The \f[C]totalwidth\f[R] attribute limits the width of the columns to
+The \f[V]totalwidth\f[R] attribute limits the width of the columns to
the given value.
.IP
.nf
@@ -8328,16 +8755,16 @@ contents...
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-The class \f[C]onlytextwidth\f[R] sets the \f[C]totalwidth\f[R] to
-\f[C]\[rs]textwidth\f[R].
+The class \f[V]onlytextwidth\f[R] sets the \f[V]totalwidth\f[R] to
+\f[V]\[rs]textwidth\f[R].
.PP
See Section 12.7 of the Beamer User\[cq]s Guide for more details.
.SS Frame attributes in beamer
.PP
-Sometimes it is necessary to add the LaTeX \f[C][fragile]\f[R] option to
-a frame in beamer (for example, when using the \f[C]minted\f[R]
+Sometimes it is necessary to add the LaTeX \f[V][fragile]\f[R] option to
+a frame in beamer (for example, when using the \f[V]minted\f[R]
environment).
-This can be forced by adding the \f[C]fragile\f[R] class to the heading
+This can be forced by adding the \f[V]fragile\f[R] class to the heading
introducing the slide:
.IP
.nf
@@ -8347,12 +8774,12 @@ introducing the slide:
.fi
.PP
All of the other frame attributes described in Section 8.1 of the Beamer
-User\[cq]s Guide may also be used: \f[C]allowdisplaybreaks\f[R],
-\f[C]allowframebreaks\f[R], \f[C]b\f[R], \f[C]c\f[R], \f[C]s\f[R],
-\f[C]t\f[R], \f[C]environment\f[R], \f[C]label\f[R], \f[C]plain\f[R],
-\f[C]shrink\f[R], \f[C]standout\f[R], \f[C]noframenumbering\f[R],
-\f[C]squeeze\f[R].
-\f[C]allowframebreaks\f[R] is recommended especially for bibliographies,
+User\[cq]s Guide may also be used: \f[V]allowdisplaybreaks\f[R],
+\f[V]allowframebreaks\f[R], \f[V]b\f[R], \f[V]c\f[R], \f[V]s\f[R],
+\f[V]t\f[R], \f[V]environment\f[R], \f[V]label\f[R], \f[V]plain\f[R],
+\f[V]shrink\f[R], \f[V]standout\f[R], \f[V]noframenumbering\f[R],
+\f[V]squeeze\f[R].
+\f[V]allowframebreaks\f[R] is recommended especially for bibliographies,
as it allows multiple slides to be created if the content overfills the
frame:
.IP
@@ -8362,7 +8789,7 @@ frame:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-In addition, the \f[C]frameoptions\f[R] attribute may be used to pass
+In addition, the \f[V]frameoptions\f[R] attribute may be used to pass
arbitrary frame options to a beamer slide:
.IP
.nf
@@ -8377,19 +8804,19 @@ beamer slide shows, and pptx slide shows.
.SS On all slides (beamer, reveal.js, pptx)
.PP
With beamer and reveal.js, the configuration option
-\f[C]background-image\f[R] can be used either in the YAML metadata block
+\f[V]background-image\f[R] can be used either in the YAML metadata block
or as a command-line variable to get the same image on every slide.
.PP
For pptx, you can use a reference doc in which background images have
been set on the relevant layouts.
-.SS \f[C]parallaxBackgroundImage\f[R] (reveal.js)
+.SS \f[V]parallaxBackgroundImage\f[R] (reveal.js)
.PP
For reveal.js, there is also the reveal.js-native option
-\f[C]parallaxBackgroundImage\f[R], which can be used instead of
-\f[C]background-image\f[R] to produce a parallax scrolling background.
-You must also set \f[C]parallaxBackgroundSize\f[R], and can optionally
-set \f[C]parallaxBackgroundHorizontal\f[R] and
-\f[C]parallaxBackgroundVertical\f[R] to configure the scrolling
+\f[V]parallaxBackgroundImage\f[R], which can be used instead of
+\f[V]background-image\f[R] to produce a parallax scrolling background.
+You must also set \f[V]parallaxBackgroundSize\f[R], and can optionally
+set \f[V]parallaxBackgroundHorizontal\f[R] and
+\f[V]parallaxBackgroundVertical\f[R] to configure the scrolling
behaviour.
See the reveal.js documentation for more details about the meaning of
these options.
@@ -8399,26 +8826,26 @@ up only on the first slide.
.SS On individual slides (reveal.js, pptx)
.PP
To set an image for a particular reveal.js or pptx slide, add
-\f[C]{background-image=\[dq]/path/to/image\[dq]}\f[R] to the first
+\f[V]{background-image=\[dq]/path/to/image\[dq]}\f[R] to the first
slide-level heading on the slide (which may even be empty).
.PP
As the HTML writers pass unknown attributes through, other reveal.js
background settings also work on individual slides, including
-\f[C]background-size\f[R], \f[C]background-repeat\f[R],
-\f[C]background-color\f[R], \f[C]transition\f[R], and
-\f[C]transition-speed\f[R].
-(The \f[C]data-\f[R] prefix will automatically be added.)
+\f[V]background-size\f[R], \f[V]background-repeat\f[R],
+\f[V]background-color\f[R], \f[V]transition\f[R], and
+\f[V]transition-speed\f[R].
+(The \f[V]data-\f[R] prefix will automatically be added.)
.PP
-Note: \f[C]data-background-image\f[R] is also supported in pptx for
-consistency with reveal.js \[en] if \f[C]background-image\f[R] isn\[cq]t
-found, \f[C]data-background-image\f[R] will be checked.
+Note: \f[V]data-background-image\f[R] is also supported in pptx for
+consistency with reveal.js \[en] if \f[V]background-image\f[R] isn\[cq]t
+found, \f[V]data-background-image\f[R] will be checked.
.SS On the title slide (reveal.js, pptx)
.PP
To add a background image to the automatically generated title slide for
-reveal.js, use the \f[C]title-slide-attributes\f[R] variable in the YAML
+reveal.js, use the \f[V]title-slide-attributes\f[R] variable in the YAML
metadata block.
It must contain a map of attribute names and values.
-(Note that the \f[C]data-\f[R] prefix is required here, as it isn\[cq]t
+(Note that the \f[V]data-\f[R] prefix is required here, as it isn\[cq]t
added automatically.)
.PP
For pptx, pass a reference doc with the background image set on the
@@ -8447,7 +8874,7 @@ Slide 2 has a special image for its background, even though the heading has no c
.SH EPUBS
.SS EPUB Metadata
.PP
-EPUB metadata may be specified using the \f[C]--epub-metadata\f[R]
+EPUB metadata may be specified using the \f[V]--epub-metadata\f[R]
option, but if the source document is Markdown, it is better to use a
YAML metadata block.
Here is an example:
@@ -8478,117 +8905,117 @@ ibooks:
.PP
The following fields are recognized:
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]identifier\f[B]\f[R]
-Either a string value or an object with fields \f[C]text\f[R] and
-\f[C]scheme\f[R].
-Valid values for \f[C]scheme\f[R] are \f[C]ISBN-10\f[R],
-\f[C]GTIN-13\f[R], \f[C]UPC\f[R], \f[C]ISMN-10\f[R], \f[C]DOI\f[R],
-\f[C]LCCN\f[R], \f[C]GTIN-14\f[R], \f[C]ISBN-13\f[R],
-\f[C]Legal deposit number\f[R], \f[C]URN\f[R], \f[C]OCLC\f[R],
-\f[C]ISMN-13\f[R], \f[C]ISBN-A\f[R], \f[C]JP\f[R], \f[C]OLCC\f[R].
+\f[V]identifier\f[R]
+Either a string value or an object with fields \f[V]text\f[R] and
+\f[V]scheme\f[R].
+Valid values for \f[V]scheme\f[R] are \f[V]ISBN-10\f[R],
+\f[V]GTIN-13\f[R], \f[V]UPC\f[R], \f[V]ISMN-10\f[R], \f[V]DOI\f[R],
+\f[V]LCCN\f[R], \f[V]GTIN-14\f[R], \f[V]ISBN-13\f[R],
+\f[V]Legal deposit number\f[R], \f[V]URN\f[R], \f[V]OCLC\f[R],
+\f[V]ISMN-13\f[R], \f[V]ISBN-A\f[R], \f[V]JP\f[R], \f[V]OLCC\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]title\f[B]\f[R]
-Either a string value, or an object with fields \f[C]file-as\f[R] and
-\f[C]type\f[R], or a list of such objects.
-Valid values for \f[C]type\f[R] are \f[C]main\f[R], \f[C]subtitle\f[R],
-\f[C]short\f[R], \f[C]collection\f[R], \f[C]edition\f[R],
-\f[C]extended\f[R].
+\f[V]title\f[R]
+Either a string value, or an object with fields \f[V]file-as\f[R] and
+\f[V]type\f[R], or a list of such objects.
+Valid values for \f[V]type\f[R] are \f[V]main\f[R], \f[V]subtitle\f[R],
+\f[V]short\f[R], \f[V]collection\f[R], \f[V]edition\f[R],
+\f[V]extended\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]creator\f[B]\f[R]
-Either a string value, or an object with fields \f[C]role\f[R],
-\f[C]file-as\f[R], and \f[C]text\f[R], or a list of such objects.
-Valid values for \f[C]role\f[R] are MARC relators, but pandoc will
+\f[V]creator\f[R]
+Either a string value, or an object with fields \f[V]role\f[R],
+\f[V]file-as\f[R], and \f[V]text\f[R], or a list of such objects.
+Valid values for \f[V]role\f[R] are MARC relators, but pandoc will
attempt to translate the human-readable versions (like \[lq]author\[rq]
and \[lq]editor\[rq]) to the appropriate marc relators.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]contributor\f[B]\f[R]
-Same format as \f[C]creator\f[R].
+\f[V]contributor\f[R]
+Same format as \f[V]creator\f[R].
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]date\f[B]\f[R]
-A string value in \f[C]YYYY-MM-DD\f[R] format.
+\f[V]date\f[R]
+A string value in \f[V]YYYY-MM-DD\f[R] format.
(Only the year is necessary.)
Pandoc will attempt to convert other common date formats.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]lang\f[B]\f[R] (or legacy: \f[B]\f[CB]language\f[B]\f[R])
+\f[V]lang\f[R] (or legacy: \f[V]language\f[R])
A string value in BCP 47 format.
Pandoc will default to the local language if nothing is specified.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]subject\f[B]\f[R]
-Either a string value, or an object with fields \f[C]text\f[R],
-\f[C]authority\f[R], and \f[C]term\f[R], or a list of such objects.
-Valid values for \f[C]authority\f[R] are either a reserved authority
-value (currently \f[C]AAT\f[R], \f[C]BIC\f[R], \f[C]BISAC\f[R],
-\f[C]CLC\f[R], \f[C]DDC\f[R], \f[C]CLIL\f[R], \f[C]EuroVoc\f[R],
-\f[C]MEDTOP\f[R], \f[C]LCSH\f[R], \f[C]NDC\f[R], \f[C]Thema\f[R],
-\f[C]UDC\f[R], and \f[C]WGS\f[R]) or an absolute IRI identifying a
+\f[V]subject\f[R]
+Either a string value, or an object with fields \f[V]text\f[R],
+\f[V]authority\f[R], and \f[V]term\f[R], or a list of such objects.
+Valid values for \f[V]authority\f[R] are either a reserved authority
+value (currently \f[V]AAT\f[R], \f[V]BIC\f[R], \f[V]BISAC\f[R],
+\f[V]CLC\f[R], \f[V]DDC\f[R], \f[V]CLIL\f[R], \f[V]EuroVoc\f[R],
+\f[V]MEDTOP\f[R], \f[V]LCSH\f[R], \f[V]NDC\f[R], \f[V]Thema\f[R],
+\f[V]UDC\f[R], and \f[V]WGS\f[R]) or an absolute IRI identifying a
custom scheme.
-Valid values for \f[C]term\f[R] are defined by the scheme.
+Valid values for \f[V]term\f[R] are defined by the scheme.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]description\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]description\f[R]
A string value.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]type\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]type\f[R]
A string value.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]format\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]format\f[R]
A string value.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]relation\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]relation\f[R]
A string value.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]coverage\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]coverage\f[R]
A string value.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]rights\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]rights\f[R]
A string value.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]belongs-to-collection\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]belongs-to-collection\f[R]
A string value.
identifies the name of a collection to which the EPUB Publication
belongs.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]group-position\f[B]\f[R]
-The \f[C]group-position\f[R] field indicates the numeric position in
+\f[V]group-position\f[R]
+The \f[V]group-position\f[R] field indicates the numeric position in
which the EPUB Publication belongs relative to other works belonging to
-the same \f[C]belongs-to-collection\f[R] field.
+the same \f[V]belongs-to-collection\f[R] field.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]cover-image\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]cover-image\f[R]
A string value (path to cover image).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]css\f[B]\f[R] (or legacy: \f[B]\f[CB]stylesheet\f[B]\f[R])
+\f[V]css\f[R] (or legacy: \f[V]stylesheet\f[R])
A string value (path to CSS stylesheet).
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]page-progression-direction\f[B]\f[R]
-Either \f[C]ltr\f[R] or \f[C]rtl\f[R].
-Specifies the \f[C]page-progression-direction\f[R] attribute for the
-\f[C]spine\f[R] element.
+\f[V]page-progression-direction\f[R]
+Either \f[V]ltr\f[R] or \f[V]rtl\f[R].
+Specifies the \f[V]page-progression-direction\f[R] attribute for the
+\f[V]spine\f[R] element.
.TP
-\f[B]\f[CB]ibooks\f[B]\f[R]
+\f[V]ibooks\f[R]
iBooks-specific metadata, with the following fields:
.RS
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]version\f[R]: (string)
+\f[V]version\f[R]: (string)
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]specified-fonts\f[R]: \f[C]true\f[R]|\f[C]false\f[R] (default
-\f[C]false\f[R])
+\f[V]specified-fonts\f[R]: \f[V]true\f[R]|\f[V]false\f[R] (default
+\f[V]false\f[R])
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]ipad-orientation-lock\f[R]:
-\f[C]portrait-only\f[R]|\f[C]landscape-only\f[R]
+\f[V]ipad-orientation-lock\f[R]:
+\f[V]portrait-only\f[R]|\f[V]landscape-only\f[R]
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]iphone-orientation-lock\f[R]:
-\f[C]portrait-only\f[R]|\f[C]landscape-only\f[R]
+\f[V]iphone-orientation-lock\f[R]:
+\f[V]portrait-only\f[R]|\f[V]landscape-only\f[R]
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]binding\f[R]: \f[C]true\f[R]|\f[C]false\f[R] (default
-\f[C]true\f[R])
+\f[V]binding\f[R]: \f[V]true\f[R]|\f[V]false\f[R] (default
+\f[V]true\f[R])
.IP \[bu] 2
-\f[C]scroll-axis\f[R]:
-\f[C]vertical\f[R]|\f[C]horizontal\f[R]|\f[C]default\f[R]
+\f[V]scroll-axis\f[R]:
+\f[V]vertical\f[R]|\f[V]horizontal\f[R]|\f[V]default\f[R]
.RE
-.SS The \f[C]epub:type\f[R] attribute
+.SS The \f[V]epub:type\f[R] attribute
.PP
-For \f[C]epub3\f[R] output, you can mark up the heading that corresponds
-to an EPUB chapter using the \f[C]epub:type\f[R] attribute.
-For example, to set the attribute to the value \f[C]prologue\f[R], use
+For \f[V]epub3\f[R] output, you can mark up the heading that corresponds
+to an EPUB chapter using the \f[V]epub:type\f[R] attribute.
+For example, to set the attribute to the value \f[V]prologue\f[R], use
this markdown:
.IP
.nf
@@ -8607,17 +9034,17 @@ Which will result in:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Pandoc will output \f[C]<body epub:type=\[dq]bodymatter\[dq]>\f[R],
+Pandoc will output \f[V]<body epub:type=\[dq]bodymatter\[dq]>\f[R],
unless you use one of the following values, in which case either
-\f[C]frontmatter\f[R] or \f[C]backmatter\f[R] will be output.
+\f[V]frontmatter\f[R] or \f[V]backmatter\f[R] will be output.
.PP
.TS
tab(@);
l l.
T{
-\f[C]epub:type\f[R] of first section
+\f[V]epub:type\f[R] of first section
T}@T{
-\f[C]epub:type\f[R] of body
+\f[V]epub:type\f[R] of body
T}
_
T{
@@ -8734,12 +9161,12 @@ T}
.SS Linked media
.PP
By default, pandoc will download media referenced from any
-\f[C]<img>\f[R], \f[C]<audio>\f[R], \f[C]<video>\f[R] or
-\f[C]<source>\f[R] element present in the generated EPUB, and include it
+\f[V]<img>\f[R], \f[V]<audio>\f[R], \f[V]<video>\f[R] or
+\f[V]<source>\f[R] element present in the generated EPUB, and include it
in the EPUB container, yielding a completely self-contained EPUB.
If you want to link to external media resources instead, use raw HTML in
-your source and add \f[C]data-external=\[dq]1\[dq]\f[R] to the tag with
-the \f[C]src\f[R] attribute.
+your source and add \f[V]data-external=\[dq]1\[dq]\f[R] to the tag with
+the \f[V]src\f[R] attribute.
For example:
.IP
.nf
@@ -8753,24 +9180,24 @@ For example:
.fi
.PP
If the input format already is HTML then
-\f[C]data-external=\[dq]1\[dq]\f[R] will work as expected for
-\f[C]<img>\f[R] elements.
+\f[V]data-external=\[dq]1\[dq]\f[R] will work as expected for
+\f[V]<img>\f[R] elements.
Similarly, for Markdown, external images can be declared with
-\f[C]{external=1}\f[R].
+\f[V]{external=1}\f[R].
Note that this only works for images; the other media elements have no
native representation in pandoc\[cq]s AST and requires the use of raw
HTML.
.SS EPUB styling
.PP
By default, pandoc will include some basic styling contained in its
-\f[C]epub.css\f[R] data file.
-(To see this, use \f[C]pandoc --print-default-data-file epub.css\f[R].)
-To use a different CSS file, just use the \f[C]--css\f[R] command line
+\f[V]epub.css\f[R] data file.
+(To see this, use \f[V]pandoc --print-default-data-file epub.css\f[R].)
+To use a different CSS file, just use the \f[V]--css\f[R] command line
option.
A few inline styles are defined in addition; these are essential for
correct formatting of pandoc\[cq]s HTML output.
.PP
-The \f[C]document-css\f[R] variable may be set if the more opinionated
+The \f[V]document-css\f[R] variable may be set if the more opinionated
styling of pandoc\[cq]s default HTML templates is desired (and in that
case the variables defined in Variables for HTML may be used to
fine-tune the style).
@@ -8778,10 +9205,10 @@ fine-tune the style).
.PP
When creating a Jupyter notebook, pandoc will try to infer the notebook
structure.
-Code blocks with the class \f[C]code\f[R] will be taken as code cells,
+Code blocks with the class \f[V]code\f[R] will be taken as code cells,
and intervening content will be taken as Markdown cells.
Attachments will automatically be created for images in Markdown cells.
-Metadata will be taken from the \f[C]jupyter\f[R] metadata field.
+Metadata will be taken from the \f[V]jupyter\f[R] metadata field.
For example:
.IP
.nf
@@ -8887,21 +9314,21 @@ hello
.fi
.PP
If you include raw HTML or TeX in an output cell, use the [raw
-attribute][Extension: \f[C]fenced_attribute\f[R]], as shown in the last
+attribute][Extension: \f[V]fenced_attribute\f[R]], as shown in the last
cell of the example above.
Although pandoc can process \[lq]bare\[rq] raw HTML and TeX, the result
is often interspersed raw elements and normal textual elements, and in
an output cell pandoc expects a single, connected raw block.
To avoid using raw HTML or TeX except when marked explicitly using raw
attributes, we recommend specifying the extensions
-\f[C]-raw_html-raw_tex+raw_attribute\f[R] when translating between
+\f[V]-raw_html-raw_tex+raw_attribute\f[R] when translating between
Markdown and ipynb notebooks.
.PP
Note that options and extensions that affect reading and writing of
Markdown will also affect Markdown cells in ipynb notebooks.
-For example, \f[C]--wrap=preserve\f[R] will preserve soft line breaks in
-Markdown cells; \f[C]--atx-headers\f[R] will cause ATX-style headings to
-be used; and \f[C]--preserve-tabs\f[R] will prevent tabs from being
+For example, \f[V]--wrap=preserve\f[R] will preserve soft line breaks in
+Markdown cells; \f[V]--atx-headers\f[R] will cause ATX-style headings to
+be used; and \f[V]--preserve-tabs\f[R] will prevent tabs from being
turned to spaces.
.SH SYNTAX HIGHLIGHTING
.PP
@@ -8911,21 +9338,21 @@ The Haskell library skylighting is used for highlighting.
Currently highlighting is supported only for HTML, EPUB, Docx, Ms, and
LaTeX/PDF output.
To see a list of language names that pandoc will recognize, type
-\f[C]pandoc --list-highlight-languages\f[R].
+\f[V]pandoc --list-highlight-languages\f[R].
.PP
-The color scheme can be selected using the \f[C]--highlight-style\f[R]
+The color scheme can be selected using the \f[V]--highlight-style\f[R]
option.
-The default color scheme is \f[C]pygments\f[R], which imitates the
+The default color scheme is \f[V]pygments\f[R], which imitates the
default color scheme used by the Python library pygments (though
pygments is not actually used to do the highlighting).
To see a list of highlight styles, type
-\f[C]pandoc --list-highlight-styles\f[R].
+\f[V]pandoc --list-highlight-styles\f[R].
.PP
If you are not satisfied with the predefined styles, you can use
-\f[C]--print-highlight-style\f[R] to generate a JSON \f[C].theme\f[R]
+\f[V]--print-highlight-style\f[R] to generate a JSON \f[V].theme\f[R]
file which can be modified and used as the argument to
-\f[C]--highlight-style\f[R].
-To get a JSON version of the \f[C]pygments\f[R] style, for example:
+\f[V]--highlight-style\f[R].
+To get a JSON version of the \f[V]pygments\f[R] style, for example:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8933,7 +9360,7 @@ pandoc --print-highlight-style pygments > my.theme
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-Then edit \f[C]my.theme\f[R] and use it like this:
+Then edit \f[V]my.theme\f[R] and use it like this:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8943,12 +9370,12 @@ pandoc --highlight-style my.theme
.PP
If you are not satisfied with the built-in highlighting, or you want
highlight a language that isn\[cq]t supported, you can use the
-\f[C]--syntax-definition\f[R] option to load a KDE-style XML syntax
+\f[V]--syntax-definition\f[R] option to load a KDE-style XML syntax
definition file.
Before writing your own, have a look at KDE\[cq]s repository of syntax
definitions.
.PP
-To disable highlighting, use the \f[C]--no-highlight\f[R] option.
+To disable highlighting, use the \f[V]--no-highlight\f[R] option.
.SH CUSTOM STYLES
.PP
Custom styles can be used in the docx and ICML formats.
@@ -8958,16 +9385,16 @@ By default, pandoc\[cq]s docx and ICML output applies a predefined set
of styles for blocks such as paragraphs and block quotes, and uses
largely default formatting (italics, bold) for inlines.
This will work for most purposes, especially alongside a
-\f[C]reference.docx\f[R] file.
+\f[V]reference.docx\f[R] file.
However, if you need to apply your own styles to blocks, or match a
preexisting set of styles, pandoc allows you to define custom styles for
-blocks and text using \f[C]div\f[R]s and \f[C]span\f[R]s, respectively.
+blocks and text using \f[V]div\f[R]s and \f[V]span\f[R]s, respectively.
.PP
-If you define a \f[C]div\f[R] or \f[C]span\f[R] with the attribute
-\f[C]custom-style\f[R], pandoc will apply your specified style to the
+If you define a \f[V]div\f[R] or \f[V]span\f[R] with the attribute
+\f[V]custom-style\f[R], pandoc will apply your specified style to the
contained elements (with the exception of elements whose function
depends on a style, like headings, code blocks, block quotes, or links).
-So, for example, using the \f[C]bracketed_spans\f[R] syntax,
+So, for example, using the \f[V]bracketed_spans\f[R] syntax,
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8976,8 +9403,8 @@ So, for example, using the \f[C]bracketed_spans\f[R] syntax,
.fi
.PP
would produce a docx file with \[lq]Get out\[rq] styled with character
-style \f[C]Emphatically\f[R].
-Similarly, using the \f[C]fenced_divs\f[R] syntax,
+style \f[V]Emphatically\f[R].
+Similarly, using the \f[V]fenced_divs\f[R] syntax,
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -8990,7 +9417,7 @@ Dickinson starts the poem simply:
\f[R]
.fi
.PP
-would style the two contained lines with the \f[C]Poetry\f[R] paragraph
+would style the two contained lines with the \f[V]Poetry\f[R] paragraph
style.
.PP
For docx output, styles will be defined in the output file as inheriting
@@ -9001,10 +9428,10 @@ This feature allows for greatest customization in conjunction with
pandoc filters.
If you want all paragraphs after block quotes to be indented, you can
write a filter to apply the styles necessary.
-If you want all italics to be transformed to the \f[C]Emphasis\f[R]
+If you want all italics to be transformed to the \f[V]Emphasis\f[R]
character style (perhaps to change their color), you can write a filter
which will transform all italicized inlines to inlines within an
-\f[C]Emphasis\f[R] custom-style \f[C]span\f[R].
+\f[V]Emphasis\f[R] custom-style \f[V]span\f[R].
.PP
For docx output, you don\[cq]t need to enable any extensions for custom
styles to work.
@@ -9014,16 +9441,16 @@ The docx reader, by default, only reads those styles that it can convert
into pandoc elements, either by direct conversion or interpreting the
derivation of the input document\[cq]s styles.
.PP
-By enabling the \f[C]styles\f[R] extension in the docx reader
-(\f[C]-f docx+styles\f[R]), you can produce output that maintains the
-styles of the input document, using the \f[C]custom-style\f[R] class.
+By enabling the \f[V]styles\f[R] extension in the docx reader
+(\f[V]-f docx+styles\f[R]), you can produce output that maintains the
+styles of the input document, using the \f[V]custom-style\f[R] class.
Paragraph styles are interpreted as divs, while character styles are
interpreted as spans.
.PP
-For example, using the \f[C]custom-style-reference.docx\f[R] file in the
+For example, using the \f[V]custom-style-reference.docx\f[R] file in the
test directory, we have the following different outputs:
.PP
-Without the \f[C]+styles\f[R] extension:
+Without the \f[V]+styles\f[R] extension:
.IP
.nf
\f[C]
@@ -9094,7 +9521,7 @@ pandoc --print-default-data-file creole.lua
.PP
If you want your custom reader to have access to reader options
(e.g.\ the tab stop setting), you give your Reader function a second
-\f[C]options\f[R] parameter.
+\f[V]options\f[R] parameter.
.PP
A custom writer is a Lua script that defines a function that specifies
how to render each element in a Pandoc AST.
@@ -9108,10 +9535,10 @@ pandoc --print-default-data-file sample.lua
.fi
.PP
Note that custom writers have no default template.
-If you want to use \f[C]--standalone\f[R] with a custom writer, you will
-need to specify a template manually using \f[C]--template\f[R] or add a
+If you want to use \f[V]--standalone\f[R] with a custom writer, you will
+need to specify a template manually using \f[V]--template\f[R] or add a
new default template with the name
-\f[C]default.NAME_OF_CUSTOM_WRITER.lua\f[R] to the \f[C]templates\f[R]
+\f[V]default.NAME_OF_CUSTOM_WRITER.lua\f[R] to the \f[V]templates\f[R]
subdirectory of your user data directory (see Templates).
.SH REPRODUCIBLE BUILDS
.PP
@@ -9119,13 +9546,13 @@ Some of the document formats pandoc targets (such as EPUB, docx, and
ODT) include build timestamps in the generated document.
That means that the files generated on successive builds will differ,
even if the source does not.
-To avoid this, set the \f[C]SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH\f[R] environment variable,
+To avoid this, set the \f[V]SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH\f[R] environment variable,
and the timestamp will be taken from it instead of the current time.
-\f[C]SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH\f[R] should contain an integer unix timestamp
+\f[V]SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH\f[R] should contain an integer unix timestamp
(specifying the number of second since midnight UTC January 1, 1970).
.PP
Some document formats also include a unique identifier.
-For EPUB, this can be set explicitly by setting the \f[C]identifier\f[R]
+For EPUB, this can be set explicitly by setting the \f[V]identifier\f[R]
metadata field (see EPUB Metadata, above).
.SH A NOTE ON SECURITY
.PP
@@ -9140,24 +9567,24 @@ Please audit filters and custom writers very carefully before using
them.
.IP "2." 3
Several input formats (including HTML, Org, and RST) support
-\f[C]include\f[R] directives that allow the contents of a file to be
+\f[V]include\f[R] directives that allow the contents of a file to be
included in the output.
An untrusted attacker could use these to view the contents of files on
the file system.
-(Using the \f[C]--sandbox\f[R] option can protect against this threat.)
+(Using the \f[V]--sandbox\f[R] option can protect against this threat.)
.IP "3." 3
Several output formats (including RTF, FB2, HTML with
-\f[C]--self-contained\f[R], EPUB, Docx, and ODT) will embed encoded or
+\f[V]--self-contained\f[R], EPUB, Docx, and ODT) will embed encoded or
raw images into the output file.
An untrusted attacker could exploit this to view the contents of
non-image files on the file system.
-(Using the \f[C]--sandbox\f[R] option can protect against this threat,
+(Using the \f[V]--sandbox\f[R] option can protect against this threat,
but will also prevent including images in these formats.)
.IP "4." 3
If your application uses pandoc as a Haskell library (rather than
shelling out to the executable), it is possible to use it in a mode that
fully isolates pandoc from your file system, by running the pandoc
-operations in the \f[C]PandocPure\f[R] monad.
+operations in the \f[V]PandocPure\f[R] monad.
See the document Using the pandoc API for more details.
.IP "5." 3
Pandoc\[cq]s parsers can exhibit pathological performance on some corner
@@ -9165,17 +9592,17 @@ cases.
It is wise to put any pandoc operations under a timeout, to avoid DOS
attacks that exploit these issues.
If you are using the pandoc executable, you can add the command line
-options \f[C]+RTS -M512M -RTS\f[R] (for example) to limit the heap size
+options \f[V]+RTS -M512M -RTS\f[R] (for example) to limit the heap size
to 512MB.
-Note that the \f[C]commonmark\f[R] parser (including
-\f[C]commonmark_x\f[R] and \f[C]gfm\f[R]) is much less vulnerable to
-pathological performance than the \f[C]markdown\f[R] parser, so it is a
+Note that the \f[V]commonmark\f[R] parser (including
+\f[V]commonmark_x\f[R] and \f[V]gfm\f[R]) is much less vulnerable to
+pathological performance than the \f[V]markdown\f[R] parser, so it is a
better choice when processing untrusted input.
.IP "6." 3
The HTML generated by pandoc is not guaranteed to be safe.
-If \f[C]raw_html\f[R] is enabled for the Markdown input, users can
+If \f[V]raw_html\f[R] is enabled for the Markdown input, users can
inject arbitrary HTML.
-Even if \f[C]raw_html\f[R] is disabled, users can include dangerous
+Even if \f[V]raw_html\f[R] is disabled, users can include dangerous
content in URLs and attributes.
To be safe, you should run all the generated HTML through an HTML
sanitizer.